IEEE Std 315-1975 (Reaffirmed 1993) ANSI Y32.2-1975 (Reaffirmed 1989) CSA Z99-1975 (Revision of IEEE Std 315-1971 ANSI Y32.1-1972 CSA Z99-1972) IEEE Standard American National Standard Canadian Standard Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams (Including Reference Designation Letters) Sponsor IEEE Standards Coordinating Committee 11, Graphic Symbols Secretariat for American National Standards Committee Y32 American Society of Mechanical Engineers Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Approved September 4, 1975 Reaffirmed October 20, 1988 Reaffirmed December 2, 1993 IEEE Standards Board Approved October 31, 1975 Reaffirmed January 16, 1989 American National Standards Institute Approved October 9, 1975 Canadian Standards Association Approved Adopted for Mandatory Use October 31, 1975 Department of Defense, United States of America -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 (ANSI Y32.2-1975) 31 October, 1975 Acceptance Notice The following Industry Standardization Document was adopted on 31 October 1975 for mandatory use by the DoD. The indicated industry groups have furnished the clearances required by existing regulations. Copies of the documents are stocked by DoD Single Stock Point, Naval Publications and Forms Center, Philadelphia, PA, 19120, for issue to military activities only. Title of Document: Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams (Including Reference Designation Class Designation Letters) Document No. (a) IEEE Std 315-1975 (b) ANSI Y32.2-1975 Date of Specific Issue Adopted: (a) 4 September, 1975 (b) 31 October, 1975 Releasing Industry Group: (a) The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (b) American National Standards Institute, Inc. -|| ||| || || Supersedes: IEEE Std 315-1971 (ANSI Y32.2-1970) | | |||| | | Military Coordinating Activity: Army - EL |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Custodians: Army - EL Navy - SH Air Force - 16 Review Activities: Army - AV, MI, MU Navy AS, OS, SH, YD User Activities: Army - ME Navy - EC, MC Project Number: DRPR-0176 Certain provisions of this standard are subject of International Standardization Agreement, ABC NAVY STD-28A, Symbols and Abbreviations for Electrical and Electronics Drawings, to which the U.S. Army also subscribes. When reaffirmations, amendment, revision, or cancellation of this standard is proposed which will effect or violate the international agreement concerned, the Military Coordinating Activity will take appropriate reconcilliation action through military international standardization channels including departmental standardization offices, if required. NOTICE: When reaffirmation, amendment, revision, or cancellation of this standard is initially proposed, the cognizant secretariat of the industry standard shall inform the Military Coordinating Activity of the proposed change and request their participation. ii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. Preface to CSA Standard Z99-1975 C11B Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams REXDALE, October 9, 1975 American National Standard Y32.2-1975 (IEEE Std 315-1975), with the modifications shown in Section 100, has been approved as CSA Standard Z99. This action was proposed by the Committee on Electrical Symbols, under the jurisdiction of the Sectional Committee on Abbreviations, Definitions and Symbols and was formerly approved by these Committees. See Section 100, Canadian Standard Z99 modifications to American National Standard Y32.2-1975 on page 83. NOTE: In order to keep abreast of progress in the industries concerned, CSA publications are subject to periodic review. Suggestions for improvement will be welcomed at all times. They will be recorded and in due course brought to the attention of the appropriate Committee for consideration. All inquiries regarding this standard should be addressed to Canadian Standards Association, 178 Rexdale Boulevard, Rexdale, Ontario M9W 1R3, Canada. IEEE Standards Board | | |||| | | Approved September 4, 1975 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Also, requests for interpretation will be accepted by the Committee. They should be worded in such a manner as to permit a simple “yes” or “no” answer based on the literal text of the requirement concerned. -- || ||| || || Joseph L. Koepfinger, Chair Warren H. Cook, Vice Chair Sava I. Sherr, Secretary Jean Jacques Archambault Robert D. Briskman Dale R. Cochran Louis Costrell Frank Davidoff Jay Forster Irvin N. Howell, Jr Stuart P. Jackson Irving Kolodny William R. Kruesi Benjamin J. Leon Anthony C. Lordi Donald T. Michael Voss A. Moore William S. Morgan William J. Neiswender Gustave Shapiro Ralph M. Showers Robert A. Soderman Leonard Thomas Charles L. Wagner William T. Wintringham Copyright © 1975 by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher. However, individual symbols contained in this standard may be utilized without further permission of the IEEE. Any statement that the symbols used are in conformance with this standard shall be on the user’s own responsibility. iii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. Foreword (This foreword is not a part of American National Standard Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams, Y32.2-1975 [IEEE Std 315-1975]) This American National Standard is a revision and expansion of American National Standard Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams, Y32.2-1970 (IEEE Std 315-1971). A substantial effort has been made to have this American National Standard compatible with approved International Electronical Commission (IEC) Recommendations (IEC Publication 117, in various parts). Electrical diagrams are a factor in international trade; the use of one common symbol language ensures a clear presentation and economical diagram preparation for a variety of users. Members of the preparing committee have been active in transmitting USA viewpoints to the cognizant IEC Technical Committee. Alternative symbols are shown only in those cases where agreement on a common symbol could not be attained at this time. It is hoped that the number of alternative symbols will be reduced in future editions. The symbols in this standard represent the best consensus that can be attained at this time. Standardization, however, must be dynamic, not static, and any solution of a problem should be tested through use and revised if necessary. It is anticipated that the contents of this standard will be modified as future needs dictate; such modifications will be made available through the issuance of approved supplements. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. They should be addressed to: Secretary, IEEE Standards Board Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. 345 East 47 Street New York, N.Y. 10017 This standard has been prepared by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standards Coordinating Committee for Letter and Graphic Symbols (SCC 11), acting for the Y32.2 Task Group on Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams of the American National Standards Committee Y32, Graphic Symbols and Designations. There has been close cooperation between the industry and DOD representatives to provide one standard that can be universally used, rather than separate documents with their tendency to differ in various respects. While credit for this accomplishment is due all participants and the organizations they represent, particular mention is given to the U.S. Department of Defense, without whose strong support in reaching the objective—standard symbols acceptable to both industry and the military departments—the effort would not have succeeded. This standard is complemented by a number of related standards listed in Section 23. iv COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. | | |||| | | || ||| || || All of the symbols are designed so that their connection points fall on a modular grid. This should help those who use a grid basis for the preparation of diagrams. By proper enlargement of the symbols the usual coordinate-grid sizes can be matched. Most symbols appearing in this standard were reproduced form original drawings prepared for the Mergenthaler Diagrammer. -- The reference designation class letters were revised to include the added new device symbols and to clarify the DS and LS categories. “D” is now listed as an alternate to the common “CR” for the common semiconductor diode family of devices. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- A variety of specialized symbols originally used for aircraft applications have been added to make this standard more comprehensive. To improve coordination with IEC publication 117, IEC approved versions of capacitor, transformer, delay, associated conductors and specialized ground symbols have been added as alternates to those long used and standardized in the United States. A number of small changes have made the existing material more closely parallel to IEC Publication 117. Symbols have been added to cover additional devices in the photo sensitive semiconductor and specialized semiconductor fields, as well as for an electronic flash lamp. Known errors have been corrected and some items have been clarified. The American National Standards Committee on Graphic Symbols and Designations, Y32, had the following personnel at the time it approved this standard: v COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. | | |||| | | || ||| || || -- Organization Represented Name of Representative Acoustical Society of America ....................................................................................................... Laurence Batchelder Harry F. Olson American Chemical Society................................................................................................................Robert F. Schuerer American Gear Manufactures Association .............................................................................................. Gerald L. Scott American Institute of Chemical Engineers ........................................................................................... James R. Couper American Institute for Design and Drafting ................................................................................................Francis Saint American Institute of Industrial Engineers ............................................................................................ Irving Goldstein American Institute of Mining, Metallurgical and Petroleum Engineers ............................................................ (Vacant) American Society of Agriculture Engineers ....................................................................................James A. Basselman American Society of Civil Engineers................................................................................................................. (Vacant) American Society for Engineering Education ....................................................................................................I. L. Hill R. T. Northup American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ............................................N. LaCourte C.W. MacPhee (Alt) American Society of Mechanical Engineers .............................................................................................R. W. Cockrell A. R. Machell, Jr. O. J. Maha H. E. Walchli American Society of Sanitary Engineering........................................................................................... James C. Church American Welding Society .............................................................................................................................A. P. Arndt Frank Speight (Alt) Association of American Railroads ........................................................................................................ M. F. McCorcle P. H. Foley Association for Computing Machinery................................................................................................. Patrick G. Skelly Arthur C. Gannet (Alt) Canadian Standards Association ......................................................................................................................A. Hendry Illuminating Engineering Society ..............................................................................................................L. E. Barbrow John E. Kaufman (Alt) Individual Member............................................................................................................................... Charles A. Fricke Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ......................................................................................... G. A. Knapp Sidney V. Soanes Steven A. Wassermann Instrument Society of America .....................................................................................................................George Platt Louis Costea (Alt) Mechanical Contractors Association of America ..........................................................................................J. R. Mance National Association of Plumbing, Heating, Cooling Contractors ................................................................R. E. White National Electrical Contractors Association ....................................................................................... William H. Paules National Electrical Manufacturers Association ......................................................................................Walter F. Huette F. V. Kupchak R. F. Franciose (Alt) Roland Russo (Alt) Mrs. R. L. Mancini (Alt) National Fluid Power Association ..................................................................................................... James L. Fisher, Jr. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Charles A. Fricke, Chair Conrad R. Muller, Vice Chair, Electrical and Electronics James L. Fisher, Jr., Vice Chair, Pictographic Symbols James R. Couper, Vice Chair, Chemical and Process George Platt, Vice Chair, Mechanical Alvin Lai, Secretary |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--| | |||| | | -- The Task Group on Graphic Symbols, Y32.2, which revised and processed this standard, had the following personnel: || ||| || || Society of Automotive Engineers ...............................................................................................................H. L. Dubocq Technical Drawing Associates ...................................................................................................................W. D. Zbinder Telephone Group ......................................................................................................................................H. A. Spielman R. E. Thiemer (Alt) US Department of the Army, Ordnance.......................................................................................................C. A. Nazian US Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards .............................................................. Gustave Shapiro US Department of Commerce, Patent Office.................................................................................................D. M. Mills US Department of the Interior .................................................................................................................... Ray Freeman US Department of the Navy ............................................................................................................................... (Vacant) Western Union Telegraph Company .................................................................................................................. (Vacant) C. A. Fricke*, Chair S. A. Wassermann, Secretary S. J. Balke L. Batchelder L. E. Barbrow V. W. Bennett H. L. Cook D. Drusdow S. K. Ghandi W. Grasson C. J. Hart A. Hendry, Canadian Liaison G. A. Knapp R. Legg* L. A. Meadows‡ C. R. Muller* C. A. Nazian R. V. Rice E. F. V. Robinson‡, Canadian Liaison J. W. Siefert R. M. Stern* J. Zeno The IEEE Standards Coordinating Committee on Letter and Graphic Symbols, SCC 11, had the following membership: C. A. Fricke, Chair C. R. Muller, Secretary R. B. Augus, Jr F. K. Becker J. C. Brown J. M. Carroll H. L. Cook E. T. B. Gross G. A. Knapp L. A. Meadows‡ R. V. Rice G. Shapiro J. W. Siefert S. V. Soanes R. M. Stern L. H . Warren S. A. Wassermann J. C. White The IEEE Subcommittee on Graphic Symbols, SCC 11.1, and the IEC Experts Subcommittee, SCC 11.6, had the following membership: C. A. Fricke, Chair SCC 11.1 C. A. Fricke, Chair pro tem, SCC 11.6 V. W. Bennett I. M. Berger (SCC 11.1) T. L. Bisbee V. Condello H. L. Cook D. Drusdow A. C. Gannett G. A. Knapp E. J. Lombardi (SCC 11.6) R. Legg J. Lusti (SCC 11.6) L. A. Meadows‡ C. R. Muller G. Panula (SCC 11.6) R. V. Rice (SCC 11.1) A. I. Rubin (SCC 11.1) F. A. Saint G. Shapiro J. W. Siefert (SCC 11.1) H. Seaman P. G. Skelly (SCC 11.6) S. V. Soanes (SCC 11.1) R. M. Stern S. A. Wasserman R. Rondinelli (Alt) W. W. Varnedoe (SCC 11.6) J. Zeno (SCC 11.1) * Member of Y32.2 Editorial Committee. ‡ Retired. vi COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | CLAUSE PAGE Introduction .........................................................................................................................................................1 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- A1 Scope .................................................................................................................................................... 1 A2 Arrangement......................................................................................................................................... 2 A3 Application........................................................................................................................................... 2 A4 Drafting Practices Applicable to Graphic Symbols ............................................................................. 3 Section 1 Qualifying Symbols ............................................................................................................................5 1.1 Adjustability Variability ............................................................................................................................................ 5 1.2 Special-Property Indicators.................................................................................................................. 7 1.3 Radiation Indicators (electromagnetic and particulate) ....................................................................... 8 1.4 Physical State Recognition Symbols.................................................................................................... 9 1.5 Test-Point Recognition Symbol ......................................................................................................... 10 1.6 Polarity Markings............................................................................................................................... 10 1.7 Direction of Flow of Power, Signal, or Information.......................................................................... 12 1.8 Kind of Current (General).................................................................................................................. 13 1.9 Connection Symbol............................................................................................................................ 14 1.10 Envelope Enclosure.......................................................................................................................................... 17 1.11 Shield Shielding .......................................................................................................................................... 18 1.12 Special Connector or Cable Indicator .............................................................................................. 19 1.13 Electret (shown with electrodes)...................................................................................................... 19 Section 2 Graphic Symbols for Fundamental Items (not included in other sections).......................................19 2.1 Resistor............................................................................................................................................... 19 2.2 Capacitor ............................................................................................................................................ 24 2.3 Antenna ............................................................................................................................................. 28 2.4 Attenuator........................................................................................................................................... 32 2.5 Battery................................................................................................................................................ 33 2.6 Delay Function Delay Line Slow-Wave Structure ......................................................................................................................... 34 2.7 Oscillator Generalized Alternating-Current Source ........................................................................................... 35 2.8 Permanent Magnet ............................................................................................................................ 35 2.9 Pickup Head ................................................................................................................................................... 35 2.10 Piezoelectric Crystal Unit (including Crystal Unit, Quartz ) .......................................................... 36 2.11 Transducer Accelerometer Motional Pickup Transducer ............................................................................................................ 36 2.12 Squib, Electric ................................................................................................................................. 37 2.13 Thermocouple (dissimilar-metals device)........................................................................................ 37 2.14 Thermal Element Thermomechanical Transducer ........................................................................................................ 38 2.15 Spark Gap Igniter Gap ....................................................................................................................................... 38 vii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE 2.16 Continuous Loop Fire Detector (temperature sensor)...................................................................... 38 2.17 Ignitor Plug ...................................................................................................................................... 38 Section 3 Graphic Symbols for Transmission Path ..........................................................................................39 3.1 Transmission Path Conductor Cable Wiring................................................................................................................................................. 39 3.2 Distribution Lines Transmission Lines ............................................................................................................................ 45 3.3 Alternative or Conditional Wiring ..................................................................................................... 47 3.4 Associated or Future .......................................................................................................................... 47 3.5 Intentional Isolation of Direct-Current Path in Coaxial or Waveguide Applications........................ 48 3.6 Waveguide ........................................................................................................................................ 48 3.7 Strip-Type Transmission Line ........................................................................................................... 49 3.8 Termination........................................................................................................................................ 49 3.9 Circuit Return..................................................................................................................................... 50 3.10 Pressure Tight Bulkhead Cable Gland Cable Sealing End............................................................................................................................. 51 Section 4 Graphic Symbols for Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays...................................................52 -- 4.1 Switching Function ............................................................................................................................ 52 4.2 Electrical Contact .............................................................................................................................. 52 4.3 Basic Contact Assemblies.................................................................................................................. 54 4.4 Magnetic Blowout Coil .................................................................................................................... 57 4.5 Operating Coil Relay Coil.......................................................................................................................................... 57 4.6 Switch................................................................................................................................................. 58 4.7 Pushbutton, Momentary or Spring-Return......................................................................................... 59 4.8 Two-circuit, Maintained or Not Spring-Return ................................................................................. 60 4.9 Nonlocking Switch, Momentary or Spring-Return............................................................................ 60 4.10 Locking Switch ................................................................................................................................ 61 4.11 Combination Locking and Nonlocking Switch................................................................................ 62 4.12 Key-Type Switch Lever Switch ................................................................................................................................... 62 4.13 Selector or Multiposition Switch ..................................................................................................... 63 4.14 Limit Switch Sensitive Switch .............................................................................................................................. 66 4.15 Safety Interlock ................................................................................................................................ 67 4.16 Switches with Time-Delay Feature.................................................................................................. 68 4.17 Flow-Actuated Switch...................................................................................................................... 69 4.18 Liquid-Level-Actuated Switch......................................................................................................... 69 4.19 Pressure- or Vacuum-Actuated Switch ............................................................................................ 69 4.20 Temperature-Actuated Switch ......................................................................................................... 70 4.21 Thermostat ....................................................................................................................................... 70 4.22 Flasher Self-Interrupting Switch ................................................................................................................... 71 4.23 Foot-Operated Switch Foot Switch ..................................................................................................................................... 72 || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- viii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE 4.24 Switch Operated by Shaft Rotation and Responsive to Speed or Direction .................................... 72 4.25 Switches with Specific Features ...................................................................................................... 73 4.26 Telegraph Key ................................................................................................................................. 73 4.27 Governor (Contact-making) Speed Regulator............................................................................................................................... 74 4.28 Vibrator, Interrupter ........................................................................................................................ 74 4.29 Contactor.......................................................................................................................................... 74 4.30 Relay ............................................................................................................................................... 76 4.31 Inertia Switch (operated by sudden deceleration)............................................................................ 78 4.32 Mercury Switch................................................................................................................................ 78 4.33 Aneroid Capsule (air pressure) Operated Switch............................................................................. 79 Section 5 Graphic Symbols for Terminals and Connectors ..............................................................................79 5.1 Terminals ........................................................................................................................................... 79 5.2 Cable Termination.............................................................................................................................. 81 5.3 Connector Disconnecting Device Jack Plug ................................................................................................................................................... 81 5.4 Connectors of the Type Commonly Used for Power-Supply Purposes ............................................ 84 5.5 Test Block .......................................................................................................................................... 86 5.6 Coaxial Connector Coaxial Junction................................................................................................................................. 86 5.7 Waveguide Flanges Waveguide Junction........................................................................................................................... 87 Section 6 Graphic Symbols for Transformers, Inductors, and Windings .........................................................88 -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.1 Core.................................................................................................................................................... 88 6.2 Inductor Winding (machine or transformer) Reactor Radio-Frequency Coil Telephone Retardation Coil ............................................................................................................... 89 6.3 Transductor Saturable-Core Inductor Saturable-Core Reactor...................................................................................................................... 90 6.4 Transformer Telephone Induction Coil Telephone Repeating Coil .................................................................................................................. 92 6.5 Linear Coupler ................................................................................................................................ 100 Section 7 Graphic Symbols for Electron Tubes and Related Devices ............................................................100 7.1 Electron Tube .................................................................................................................................. 100 7.2 General Notes................................................................................................................................... 104 7.3 Typical Applications ........................................................................................................................ 105 7.4 Solion Ion-Diffusion Device ....................................................................................................................... 109 7.5 Coulomb Accumulator Electrochemical Step-Function Device ........................................................................................... 110 ix COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE 7.6 Conductivity Cell ............................................................................................................................. 110 7.7 Nuclear-Radiation Detector (gas-filled) Ionization Chamber Proportional Counter Tube Geiger-Müller Counter Tube ........................................................................................................... 110 Section 8 Graphic Symbols for Semiconductor Devices ................................................................................111 8.1 Semiconductor Device Transistor Diode ............................................................................................................................................... 111 8.2 Element Symbols ............................................................................................................................. 111 8.3 Special-Property Indicators.............................................................................................................. 116 8.4 Rules for Drawing Style 1 Symbols................................................................................................. 117 8.5 Typical Applications, Two-Terminal Devices................................................................................. 118 8.6 Typical Applications, Three- (or more) Terminal Devices.............................................................. 123 8.7 Photosensitive Cell........................................................................................................................... 129 8.8 Semiconductor Thermocouple ......................................................................................................... 130 8.9 Hall Element Hall Generator.................................................................................................................................. 130 8.10 Photon-Coupled Isolator ................................................................................................................ 130 8.11 Solid-State Thyratron (replacement type)...................................................................................... 131 Section 9 Graphic Symbols for Circuit Protectors..........................................................................................132 9.1 Fuse (one-time thermal current-overload device)............................................................................ 132 9.2 Current Limiter (for power cable).................................................................................................... 133 9.3 Lightning Arrester Arrester (electric surge, etc) Gap ................................................................................................................................................... 134 9.4 Circuit Breaker ................................................................................................................................ 135 9.5 Protective Relay ............................................................................................................................... 136 Section 10 Graphic Symbols for Acoustic Devices ........................................................................................140 10.1 Audible-Signaling Device.............................................................................................................. 140 10.2 Microphone Telephone Transmitter ................................................................................................................... 142 10.3 Handset Operator’s Set................................................................................................................................. 142 10.4 Telephone Receiver Earphone Hearing-Aid Receiver..................................................................................................................... 143 Section 11 Graphic Symbols for Lamps and Visual-Signaling Devices ........................................................144 11.1 Lamp .............................................................................................................................................. 144 11.2 Visual-Signaling Device ................................................................................................................ 146 Section 12 Graphic Symbols for Readout Devices .........................................................................................148 12.1 Meter .............................................................................................................................................. 148 x -- || ||| || || COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE 12.2 Electromagnetically Operated Counter Message Register............................................................................................................................ 149 Section 13 Graphic Symbols for Rotating Machinery ....................................................................................150 13.1 Rotating Machine........................................................................................................................... 150 13.2 Field, Generator or Motor .............................................................................................................. 151 13.3 Winding Connection Symbols ....................................................................................................... 152 13.4 Applications: Direct-Current Machines ......................................................................................... 153 13.5 Applications: Alternating-Current Machines................................................................................. 158 13.6 Applications: Alternating-Current Machines with Direct-Current Field Excitation ..................... 161 13.7 Applications: Alternating- and Direct-Current Composite............................................................ 162 13.8 Synchro ......................................................................................................................................... 163 Section 14 Graphic Symbols for Mechanical Functions.................................................................................164 -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 14.1 Mechanical Connection Mechanical Interlock ...................................................................................................................... 164 14.2 Mechanical Motion ........................................................................................................................ 165 14.3 Clutch Brake .............................................................................................................................................. 166 14.4 Manual Control .............................................................................................................................. 167 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Section 15 Graphic Symbols Commonly Used in Connection with VHF, UHF, SHF Circuits.....................168 15.1 Discontinuity (Introducing intentional wave reflection)................................................................ 168 15.2 Coupling......................................................................................................................................... 170 15.3 Directional Coupler ....................................................................................................................... 172 15.4 Hybrid Directionally Selective Transmission Devices............................................................................... 173 15.5 Mode Transducer ........................................................................................................................... 174 15.6 Mode Suppressor............................................................................................................................ 175 15.7 Rotary Joint (radio-frequency rotary coupler) ............................................................................... 175 15.8 Nonreciprocal Devices................................................................................................................... 176 15.9 Resonator Tuned Cavity ................................................................................................................................. 177 15.10 Resonator (cavity-type) Tube....................................................................................................... 178 15.11 Magnetron .................................................................................................................................... 178 15.12 Velocity-Modulation (velocity-variation) Tube........................................................................... 179 15.13 Transmit-Receive (TR) Tube ....................................................................................................... 179 15.14 Traveling-Wave-Tube.................................................................................................................. 180 15.15 Balun ............................................................................................................................................ 182 15.16 Filter ............................................................................................................................................. 182 15.17 Phase Shifter (matched) ............................................................................................................... 182 15.18 Ferrite Bead Ring ......................................................................................................................... 183 15.19 Line Stretcher (with female connectors shown) .......................................................................... 183 xi COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE Section 18 Graphic Symbols for Digital Logic Functions............................................................................ 194 18.1 Digital Logic Functions ................................................................................................................. 194 Section 19 Graphic Symbols for Special-Purpose Maintenance Diagrams ....................................................194 19.0 Introduction.................................................................................................................................... 194 19.1 Data-Flow Code Signals ................................................................................................................ 195 19.2 Functional Circuits......................................................................................................................... 197 Section 20 Graphic Symbols Commonly Used on System Diagrams, Maps, and Charts ..............................198 20.1 Radio Station.................................................................................................................................. 198 20.2 Space Station.................................................................................................................................. 200 20.3 Exchange Equipment ..................................................................................................................... 201 20.4 Telegraph Repeater ........................................................................................................................ 201 20.5 Telegraph Equipment..................................................................................................................... 203 20.6 Telephone Set................................................................................................................................. 206 xii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. | | |||| | | 17.1 Operational Amplifier .................................................................................................................... 192 17.2 Summing Amplifier ....................................................................................................................... 192 17.3 Integrator (Amplifier) .................................................................................................................... 192 17.4 Electronic Multiplier ...................................................................................................................... 193 17.5 Electronic Divider .......................................................................................................................... 193 17.6 Electronic Function Generator ....................................................................................................... 193 17.7 Generalized Integrator.................................................................................................................... 193 17.8 Positional Servomechanism ........................................................................................................... 193 17.9 Function Potentiometer .................................................................................................................. 193 || ||| || || Section 17 Graphic Symbols for Analog and Digital Logic Functions ..........................................................192 -- 16.1 Circuit Assembly Circuit Subassembly Circuit Element .............................................................................................................................. 184 16.2 Amplifier ....................................................................................................................................... 185 16.3 Rectifier.......................................................................................................................................... 187 16.4 Repeater (includes Telephone Repeater) ....................................................................................... 187 16.5 Network Artificial Line (other than delay line)............................................................................................. 188 16.6 Phase Shifter Phase-Changing Network............................................................................................................... 188 16.7 Chopper ......................................................................................................................................... 189 16.8 Diode-Type Ring Demodulator Diode-Type Ring Modulator .......................................................................................................... 190 16.9 Gyro Gyroscope Gyrocompass .................................................................................................................................. 190 16.10 Position Indicator ......................................................................................................................... 190 16.11 Position Transmitter..................................................................................................................... 191 16.12 Fire Extinguisher Actuator Heads................................................................................................ 191 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Section 16 Graphic Symbols for Composite Assemblies ...............................................................................184 CLAUSE PAGE Section 21 Graphic Symbols Commonly Used on System Diagrams, Maps, and Charts ..............................208 21.1 Generating Station.......................................................................................................................... 208 21.2 Hydroelectric Generating Station................................................................................................... 208 21.3 Thermoelectric Generating Station ................................................................................................ 209 21.4 Prime Mover (qualifying symbols) ................................................................................................ 210 21.5 Substation....................................................................................................................................... 210 Section 22 Class Designation Letters .............................................................................................................211 22.1 Class Designation Letter ................................................................................................................ 211 22.2 Special Considerations for Class Designation Letter Assignment................................................. 211 22.3 Item Names .................................................................................................................................... 212 22.4 Class Designation Letters: Alphabetical List................................................................................. 212 22.5 Item Names: Alphabetical List ...................................................................................................... 220 22.6 Item Designations, IEC 113-2........................................................................................................ 220 Section 23 Referenced Standards and Canadian Standard Z99 Modifications...............................................220 23.1 Referenced Standards .................................................................................................................... 220 100 Canadian Standard Z99 Modifications to American National Standard Y32.2-1975 (IEEE Std 315-1975).......................................................................................................................................221 Annex D (Informative) Revised or Deleted Symbols .................................................................................................226 Annex E (Informative) Revised or Deleted Symbols .................................................................................................236 -- Annex F (Informative) Cross-Reference List of Class Designation Letters ...............................................................241 | | |||| | | Annex C (Informative) Revised or Deleted Symbols .................................................................................................225 || ||| || || Annex B (Informative) Reference Data International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Publication 117: Recommended Graphical Symbols.............................................................................................................223 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Annex A (Informative) Cross Reference List of Changed Item Numbers .................................................................222 xiii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Quick Reference to Symbols COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- xiv Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--| | |||| | | || ||| || || -- xv COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- xvi COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- xvii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- xviii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--| | |||| | | || ||| || || -- xix COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- xx COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Standard American National Standard Canadian Standard Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams (Including Reference Designation Letters) Introduction A1. Scope A1.1 Purpose This standard provides a list of graphic symbols and class designation letters for use on electrical and electronics diagrams. 1 -- For example, when a lamp is employed as a nonlinear resistor, the nonlinear resistor symbol is used. For reference designation information, see Section 22 of this standard. | | |||| | | The class designation letter portion of a reference designation is for the purpose of identifying an item by category or class, using a class letter as defined in Section 22 of this standard. The assignment of the reference designation should || ||| || || Graphic symbols for electrical engineering are a shorthand used to show graphically the functioning or interconnections of a circuit. A graphic symbol represents the function of a part in the circuit.1 Graphic symbols are used on single-line (one-line) diagrams, on schematic or elementary diagrams, or, as applicable, on connection or wiring diagrams. Graphic symbols are correlated with parts lists, descriptions, or instructions by means of designations. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- A1.2 Definition and Use 1 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR be in accordance with American National Standard Reference Designations for Electrical and Electronics Parts and Equipment, Y32.16-1975 (IEEE Std 200-1975). A2. Arrangement A2.1 Indexing, Grouping, and Standard Item Names All terms appear in the Index. In the index, “Item” refers to a numbered paragraph in the list of symbols. Items are arranged sectionally in family groups by general type. Terms in preferred usage and current alternatives are listed. F indicates item names from the Federal Item Identification Guide, Cataloging Handbook H6-1 (published by the Defense Supply Agency, Defense Logistics Services Center, Battle Creek, Michigan). A2.2 Significance of Columnar Placement of Symbols -|| ||| || || In the list, graphic symbols appear under their respective family names. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left in each column; symbols for complete diagrams appear at the right. Symbols suitable for all types of diagrams appear in the center. | | |||| | | Symbols appearing only at the right may be used on one-line diagrams provided connections are restricted to main signal paths. Symbols appearing at the left may be used for other diagrams provided all connections are shown and adequate notations are included, if needed. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- A2.3 IEC Identification Symbols and buildups using symbols that have been recommended by the International Electrotechnical Commission are indicated by IEC. A2.4 Alternative Symbols When alternative symbols are shown, the relative position of the symbols does not imply a preference; however, alternative symbols identified as IEC are recommended. A3. Application A3.1 Generation of Symbols Not Shown (Buildups) An application is an example of a combination of symbols in the list. No attempt has been made to list all possible applications (buildups); typical applications usually have been shown using only one of the possible alternatives. Additional applications may be devised using basic symbols in the list to complete the buildup, provided they are a reasonable and intelligible use of the symbols. If a specific symbol appears in this standard for an item, however, it shall be used in lieu of buildup symbols of the individual elements unless a clarification of the internal operation of the item is necessary. A3.2 Qualifying Symbols (Section 1) Qualifying symbols may be added to symbols if the special characteristic is important to the function of the device and aids in the understanding of the over-all function performed. When the special characteristic represented by the qualifying symbol is not important to the over-all function performed, the qualifying symbol may be omitted from the buildup symbols which appear in this standard, provided the absence of the qualifying symbol will not change the identity of the item. For example, see symbol 2.1.12.1.1. 2 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 A3.3 Application Data Reference For application of these symbols on electrical diagrams, see American National Standard Drafting Practices; Electrical and Electronics Diagrams, Y14.15-1966 (R1973). A3.4 Graphic Symbols and Class Designation Letters Used in Existing Technical Documents Unless otherwise specified, when revising an existing document use the most recently approved graphic symbols and reference designation class letters for any new symbols to be added to that document. Superseded symbols and reference designations already appearing in the document and in accordance with former additions of this standard may remain. A3.5 Similar or Identical Graphic Symbols, Letter Combinations, and Notations A4.1.2 Schematic or Elementary Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. The schematic diagram facilitates tracing the circuit and its functions without regard to the actual physical size, shape, or location of the component device or parts. A4.1.3 Symbol: A symbol shall be considered as the aggregate of all its parts. A4.2 Orientation Except where noted, the orientation of a symbol on a drawing, including a mirror-image presentation, does not alter the meaning of the symbol. Letters and numbers that constitute a part of a symbol shall not be presented in mirror-image form. A4.3 Line Width The width of a line does not affect the meaning of the symbol. In specific cases, a wider (heavier) line may be used for emphasis. A4.4 Enlargement or Reduction A symbol may be drawn to any proportional size that suits a particular drawing, depending on reduction or enlargement anticipated. If essential for purposes of contrast, some symbols may be drawn relatively smaller than the other symbols on a diagram. It is recommended that only two sizes be used on any one diagram. 3 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. | | |||| | | A4.1.1 Single-Line (One-Line) Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein. || ||| || || A4.1 Definitions -- A4. Drafting Practices Applicable to Graphic Symbols |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Graphic symbols in this document may be similar or identical to symbols with different meanings used (1) in diverse fields within this standard or (2) in standards adopted by other technologies. Only one meaning shall apply to a specific symbol used on a diagram. If symbols having multiple meanings must be used on a diagram the possibility of conflicts and misinterpretations can be minimized by the liberal use of caution notes, asterisks, and flagging techniques; a tabulation listing the intended meanings should be provided. This requirement is especially critical if the graphic symbols used are from different disciplines and therefore represent devices, conductors, or lines of flow that if misinterpreted may result in damage to the equipment or be hazardous to the life of servicing or operating personnel. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR A4.5 Relative Symbol Size2 The symbols shown in this edition of the standard are in their correct relative size. This relationship shall be maintained as nearly as possible on any particular drawing, regardless of the size of the symbol used. A4.6 Arrowheads The arrowhead of a symbol may be closed or open → unless otherwise noted in this standard. A4.7 Terminal Symbols The standard symbol for a TERMINAL (o) may be added to each point of attachment of connecting lines to any one of the graphic symbols. Such added terminal symbols should not be considered as part of the individual graphic symbol, unless the terminal symbol is included in the symbol shown in this standard. A4.8 Correlation of Symbol Parts For simplification of a diagram, parts of a symbol for a device, such as a relay or contactor, may be separated. If this is done, provide suitable designations to show proper correlation of the parts. A4.9 Angle of Connecting Lines In general, the angle at which a connecting line is brought to a graphic symbol has no particular significance unless otherwise noted or shown in this standard. A4.10 Future or Associated Paths and Equipment Associated or future paths and equipment shall be shown by lines composed of short dashes:- - -. For example: A4.11 Envelope or Enclosure A4.11.1 The envelope or enclosure symbol shall be used: a) If the enclosure has an essential operating function, as in an electron tube, solion, switch in an evacuated envelope, etc. 2 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- 4 || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- The symbols shown in this edition of the standard are larger in size than those shown in the 1967 edition. All of the symbols have been prepared so that the connection points are located at intersections of a modular (incremental) grid. COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS b) IEEE Std 315-1975 If the device envelope is electrically connected to one of the device elements and this is an essential (not merely incidental) functional property of the device. A4.11.2 The envelope or enclosure symbol should be used: a) b) c) To emphasize that certain symbols having nonconnected lines are a single assembly (for example, see symbol 8.6.10.5). If it is desired to distinguish a class of devices, such as transistors or semiconductor controlled rectifiers, from other devices (but this should be consistent for all devices of the same class on any one diagram). To associate the parts of symbols having adjacent characteristic qualifiers (for example: t°, τ, ω, ×). A4.11.3 The envelope or enclosure symbol may be omitted from a symbol referencing this paragraph, where confusion would not result (but this should be consistently applied to all symbols of the same class in any one diagram). -- A4.12 Addition of Supplementary Data || ||| || || | | |||| | | Details of type, impedance, rating, etc, may be added adjacent to any symbol, when required. If used, abbreviations should be from American National Standard Abbreviations for Use on Drawings and in text, Y1.1-1972. For military applications, see Section 23. Letter combinations used as parts of graphic symbols are not abbreviations or designations. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Recommendations for corrections and additions to or deletions from this standard should be sent to the Secretary, IEEE Standards Board, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, 345 East 47 Street, New York, N.Y. 10017, and should include the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) Requestor (name, address, affiliation) Reason for (and urgency of) request Item name—list all known names for the item, including tradenames (include Federal Item Identification Guide, Handbook H6-1, listing if applicable) Item definition (list source documents) Symbols currently in use or known to be used (single-line/schematic/both) Proposed symbol Reference designation class designation letter Areas of application (military/industry/commercial) Fields of application (computer/power/radio, etc) Circuit application (amplifier/rectifier/flip-flop, etc) Hardware characteristics (microcircuit/conventional, etc) Present and anticipated frequency of use (per circuit/per equipment/in general) Copy of drawing showing use of symbol 1. Qualifying Symbols 1.1 Adjustability Variability These recognition symbols shall be drawn at about 45 degrees across the body of symbol to which they are applied. For typical applications, see symbols 2.1.5, 2.2.4, 2.4.4, and 16.2.5. 5 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Use only if essential to indicate special property. NOTES: 1 — See introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 1.1.1 Adjustability (extrinsic adjustability) 1.1.1.1 General 1.1.1.2 Preset, general | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 1.1.1.3 Linear (shown applied to 1.1.1.1) -- || ||| || || 1.1.1.4 Nonlinear (shown applied to 1.1.1.1) 1.1.2 Inherent variability (intrinsic variability) 1.1.2.1 Linear 1.1.2.2 Nonlinear 6 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 1.1.3 Special features (shown applied to the general adjustability symbol) 1.1.3.1 Continuous 1.1.3.2 In steps 1.1.4 Special features (shown applied to the general preset symbol) 1.1.4.1 Continuous A special function or property essential to circuit operation shall be indicated by a supplementary symbol placed within the envelope or adjacent to the symbol. NOTE — 1.2A: Basic symbols (such as resistor, capacitor, inductor, piezoelectric crystal, etc) may be used as qualifying symbols to other symbols for purposes of indicating special properties of the device. 1.2.1 Temperature dependence 1.2.2 Magnetic-field dependence 1.2.3 Storage (Greek letter tau) 7 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- 1.2 Special-Property Indicators || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 1.1.4.2 In steps IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 1.2.4 Saturable properties (general) May be drawn between or across two or more windings (see symbol 6.3.1) that are magnetically coupled by a saturable core. -|| ||| || || 1.2.5 Delay | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 1.3 Radiation Indicators (electromagnetic and particulate) Use only if essential to indicate special property. NOTES: 1.3A — Arrows pointing toward a symbol denote that the device symbolized will respond to incident radiation of the indicated type. 1.3B — Arrows pointing away from a symbol denote the emission of the indicated type of radiation by the device symbolized. 1.3C — Arrows located within a symbol denote a self-contained radiation source. 1.3.1 Radiation, nonionizing, electromagnetic (e.g., radio waves or visible light) 1.3.2 Radiation, ionizing NOTE — 1.3.2A: If it is necessary to show the specific type of ionizing radiation, the symbol may be augmented by the addition of symbols or letters such as the following IEC: Alpha particle Beta particle Gamma ray Deutron Proton Neutron Pion K-meson Muon X-ray 8 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc α β γ d p n π τ K X Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 1.4 Physical State Recognition Symbols NOTE — 1.4A: The rectangle is not part of the symbol. || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 1.4.1 Gas (air); pneumatic -- 1.4.2 Liquid 1.4.3 Solid 1.4.4 Showing two or more states Use only if essential to indicate special condition. NOTES: 1.4.4A — A combination of physical state recognition symbols indicates a material in more than one state. The relative sizes and locations of the recognition symbols indicate the normal or predominant state of the device. 1.4.4B — Do not rotate or show in mirror-image form. 1.4.4.1 Application: Gaseous liquid 1.4.4.2 Application: Steam (or moist gas) 9 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 1.4.5 Electret material 1.5 Test-Point Recognition Symbol Used if necessary to emphasize test points. NOTE — 1.5A: If other types of symbols (such as, stars, numbered circles, etc.) are substituted for the test-point recognition symbol, they shall be explained on the diagram or referenced document. 1.5.1 General 1.5.2 Application: test-point recognition for a test jack 1.5.3 Application: test-point recognition for the plate of a triode -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 1.5.4 Application: test-point recognition for a circuit terminal |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 1.6 Polarity Markings 1.6.1 Positive 10 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 1.6.2 Negative 1.6.3 Instantaneous polarity markings -- 1.6.3B — The polarity marks shall be placed near one end of each coil or winding symbol. The exact location is immaterial as long as they are unambiguously placed, especially where other windings are drawn nearby. There shall be only one polarity mark per winding, even if the winding is tapped. The following is NOT permitted: | | |||| | | 1.6.3A — Instantaneous polarity of voltage across windings corresponds at points indicated by polarity marks. Instantaneous direction of current into (or out of) one polarity mark corresponds to current out of (or into) the other polarity mark. If instantaneous currents enter the windings at the marked points, they will produce aiding fluxes. || ||| || || NOTES: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- These polarity marks shall be used only when it is necessary to show the relative polarity of the windings. 1.6.3.1 Application: instantaneous polarity markings with current transformer shown 1.6.3.2 Application: instantaneous polarity markings with potential transformer shown 11 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 1.7 Direction of Flow of Power, Signal, or Information Avoid conflict with symbols 9.5, 9.5.2, and 9.5.4 if used on the same diagram 1.7.1 One-way NOTE — 1.7.1A: The lower symbol is used if it is necessary to conserve space. The arrowhead in the lower symbol shall be filled. 1.7.2 Either way (but not simultaneously) 1.7.3 Both ways, simultaneously -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | Avoid conflict with symbol 9.2 if used on the same diagram 1.7.4 Application: one-way, general |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTE — 1.7.4A: The “n” is not part of the symbol. A significant waveform, frequency, or frequency range shall be substituted for “n.” 12 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 1.7.5 Application: one-way circuit element, general NOTE — 1.7.5A: In all cases, indicate the type of apparatus by appropriate words or letters in the rectangle. 1.8 Kind of Current (General) NOTE — 1.8A: Use only if necessary for clarity. 1.8.1 Direct current To be used in cases when other symbol is not suitable 1.8.2 Alternating current 1.8.3 Alternating current, frequency ranges Use only if necessary to distinguish among different frequency bands. NOTES: 1.8.3A — The “n” is not part of the symbol. The frequency range shall be substituted for “n.” 1.8.3B — Only one name for the unit of frequency (hertz or cycle per second) should be used on any one diagram. 1.8.3.1 Power frequencies 13 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 1.8.3.2 Audio frequencies 1.8.3.3 Superaudio, carrier, and radio frequencies 1.8.4 Direct or alternating current (universal) 1.8.5 Undulating or rectified current 1.9 Connection Symbol For use adjacent to the symbols; e.g., see symbols 6.4.15.1 and 13.3. 1.9.1 2-phase 3-wire, ungrounded 1.9.1.1 2-phase 3-wire, grounded 1.9.2 2-phase 4-wire 14 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 1.9.2.1 2-phase 5-wire, grounded 1.9.3 3-phase 3-wire, delta or mesh 1.9.3.1 3-phase 3-wire , delta, grounded 1.9.4 3-phase 4-wire, delta, ungrounded 1.9.4.1 3-phase 4-wire, delta, grounded 1.9.5 3-phase, open-delta 1.9.5.1 3-phase, open-delta, grounded at common point 1.9.5.2 3-phase, open-delta, grounded at middle point of one winding Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | 15 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 1.9.6 3-phase, broken-delta 1.9.7 3-phase, wye or star, ungrounded 1.9.7.1 3-phase, wye, grounded neutral |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- The direction of the stroke representing the neutral can be chosen arbitrarily. | | |||| | | 1.9.8 3-phase 4-wire, ungrounded -- || ||| || || 1.9.9 3-phase, zigzag, ungrounded 1.9.9.1 3-phase, zigzag, grounded 1.9.10 3-phase, Scott or T 1.9.11 6-phase, double-delta 16 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 1.9.12 6-phase, hexagonal (or chordal) -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 1.9.13 6-phase, star (or diametrical) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 1.9.13.1 6-phase, star, with grounded neutral 1.9.14 6-phase, double zigzag with neutral brought out and grounded 1.10 Envelope Enclosure The general envelope symbol identifies the envelope or enclosure regardless of evacuation or pressure. When used with electron-tube component symbols, the general envelope symbol indicates a vacuum enclosure unless otherwise specified. A gas-filled device may be indicated by a dot within the envelope symbol. See paragraph A4.11.1 of the Introduction NOTE — 1.10A: The shape of the envelope symbol may be modified to approximate the distinctive shape of a device if the shape will aid in recognition of the device, or in depicting the device function, e.g., cathode-ray tube, iconoscope, image orthicon, vidicon, X-ray tube, etc. For typical applications, see symbols 7.3.6.1 and 7.3.6.2.2. 1.10.1 General 17 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 1.10.2 Split envelope If necessary, envelope may be split. 1.10.3 Application: gas-filled envelope The gas-recognition symbol (dot) may be located as convenient. See symbol 1.4.1 1.10.4 Application: liquid-filled envelope The liquid-recognition symbol may be located as convenient. See symbol 1.4.2 1.11 Shield Shielding Normally used for electric or magnetic shielding. NOTE — 1.11.1A: If essential to show type of shielding add E for electric and M for magnetic shielding. When used for other shielding, a note should so indicate. For typical applications see CAPACITOR (symbol 2.2.3) TRANSMISSION PATH (symbols 3.1.8.1, 3.1.8.2, and 3.1.8.3) TRANSFORMER (symbols 6.4.2.2 and 6.4.2.3) 1.11.1 General These are long dashes. 18 -- || ||| || || Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 1.11.2 Optical 1.12 Special Connector or Cable Indicator NOTES: 1.12A — If it is essential to denote on a system-type interconnection wiring diagram that the connector or cable is furnished with the equipment by the equipment manufacturer the following symbol shall be used. 1.12B— It is recommended that the symbol be drawn using a 0.20 inch diameter circle. 1.13 Electret (shown with electrodes) NOTE — 1.13A: The longer line represents the positive pole. NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. -- 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. || ||| || || See also Section 19. | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Cross References 2. Graphic Symbols for Fundamental Items (not included in other sections) 2.1 Resistor For resistors with nonlinear characteristics, see also BALLAST LAMP (symbol 11.1.5) NOTE — 2.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always add identification within or adjacent to the rectangle. 19 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.1.1 General 2.1.2 Tapped resistor 2.1.3 Application: with adjustable contact. See also symbol 14.2.5 2.1.3.1 Application: with adjustable contact and OFF (disconnect) position F ; rheostat -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.1.4 Application: adjustable or continuously adjustable (variable) resistor 20 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 2.1.5 Nonlinear resistor (intrinsic) 2.1.6 Symmetrical varistor (intrinsic); voltage-sensitive resistor F (silicon carbide, etc) 2.1.7 Magnetoresistor (intrinsic) (linear type shown) 2.1.8 Heating resistor 2.1.9 Instrument or relay shunt Connect instrument or relay to terminals in the rectangle 21 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.1.10 Shunt resistor 2.1.11 Resistive termination Commonly used in coaxial and waveguide diagrams. 2.1.11.1 Application: series resistor and path open 2.1.11.2 Application: series resistor and path short-circuited 2.1.11.3 Bolometer element ( - — - lines indicate direct-current connections and are not part of the symbol) 2.1.12 Thermistor; thermal resistor F ; temperature-sensing element NOTE — 2.1.12A: Use only if essential to indicate special characteristic. 2.1.12.1 General 22 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 2.1.12.1.1 Linear 2.1.12.1.2 Nonlinear 2.1.12.1.3 Positive temperature coefficient 2.1.12.1.4 Negative temperature coefficient 2.1.12.2 With independent integral heater 2.1.12.2.1 Nonlinear 2.1.13 Symmetrical photoconductive transducer (resistive) 23 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.2 Capacitor NOTES: 2.2A — Capacitors may be represented by either of two methods. For convenience in referring to the capacitor symbols in this section, they are classified as follows: Style 1 symbols are drawn with two parallel lines (IEC preferred). Style 2 symbols are drawn with one straight and one curved line. 2.2C — The distance between the plates shall be between one-fifth and one-third of the length of a plate. IEC -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 2.2.1 General |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.2B — Where there is only one style shown and reference is made to the general symbol 2.2.1, this indicates that either style may be used, as modified for that particular application. 2.2.1.1 With identified electrode NOTES: 2.2.1.1A — For style 1, if it is necessary to identify the capacitor electrodes, the modified element shall represent the outside or lower potential electrode. IEC 2.2.1.1B — For style 2, if it is necessary to identify the capacitor electrodes, the curved element shall represent: a) The outside electrode in fixed paper-dielectric and ceramic-dielectric capacitors; b) The moving element in adjustable and variable capacitors; c) The low-potential element in feed-through capacitors. IEC See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 24 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 2.2.2 Polarized capacitor |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 2.2.3 Shielded capacitor || ||| || || | | |||| | | See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B -- 2.2.4 Adjustable or variable capacitors NOTE — 2.2.4A: If it is necessary to identify trimmer capacitors, the letter T should appear adjacent to the symbol. See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 2.2.4.1 With moving element indicated NOTE — 2.2.4.1A: If it is desired to indicate the moving element, the common intersection of the moving element with the symbol for variability and the connecting line is marked with a dot. IEC See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 2.2.5 Application: adjustable or variable capacitors with mechanical linkage of units See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 25 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.2.6 Continuously adjustable or variable differential capacitor The capacitance of one part increases as the capacitance of the other part decreases. See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 2.2.7 Phase-shifter capacitor See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 2.2.8 Split-stator capacitor 2.2.9 Feed-through capacitor Commonly used for bypassing high-frequency currents to chassis. NOTE — 2.2.9A: For purposes of clarity, terminals may be shown on the feed-through element. -- || ||| || || See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- The capacitances of both parts increase or decrease simultaneously. See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 2.2.9.1 Application: feed-through capacitor between two inductors with third lead connected to chassis See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 26 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 2.2.10 Capacitive termination Commonly used on coaxial and wave-guide diagrams. 2.2.10.1 Application: series capacitor and path open See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 2.2.10.2 Application: series capacitor and path short-circuited See General Symbols 2.2.1 and Note 2.2B 2.2.11 Shunt capacitor NOTE — 2.2.12A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. If specific identifications is desired, the asterisk is to be replaced by one of the following letter combinations: || ||| || || | | |||| | | Carrier communication Carrier load control Carrier relaying Carrier supervisory Carrier telemetering Carrier transferred trip -- COM LC REL SUP TLM TT |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.2.12 Coupling capacitor (for power-line carrier) 2.2.13 Capacitor bushing for circuit breaker or transformer 27 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR -|| ||| || || 2.2.14 Application: capacitor-bushing potential device | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.2.15 Application: carrier-coupling capacitor potential device (used to provide a power-system-frequency voltage and also coupling for carrier signals) NOTE — 2.2.15A: The dagger is not part of the symbol. If specific indication is desired, the dagger is to be replaced by a letter combination from item 12.1, Note 12.1A. 2.2.16 Application: coupling capacitor potential device (used only to provide a power-system-frequency voltage) 2.3 Antenna F 2.3.1 General Types of functions may be indicated by words or abbreviations adjacent to the symbol. Qualifying symbols may be added to the antenna symbol to indicate polarization, direction of radiation, or special application. If required, the general shape of the main lobes of the antenna polar diagrams may be shown adjacent to the symbol. Notes may be added to show the direction and rate of lobe movement. The stem of the symbol may represent any type of balanced or unbalanced feeder, including a single conductor. 28 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.3.1.1 Application: turnstile antenna || ||| || || | | |||| | | 2.3.2 Dipole 2.3.4 Antenna counterpoise -- 2.3.3 Loop F 2.3.5 Qualifying symbols to indicate polarization Use only if essential to indicate special property of an antenna. 2.3.5.1 Plane polarization 29 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.3.5.2 Application: antenna with horizontal polarization 2.3.5.3 Application: antenna with vertical polarization -- 2.3.5.4 Circular polarization || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.3.5.5 Application: antenna with circular polarization 2.3.6 Qualifying symbols to indicate direction of radiation Use only if essential to indicate special property of an antenna. NOTES: 2.3.6A — Any applicable adjustability symbol (item 1.1) may be used to supplement a qualifying symbol. 2.3.6B — Antenna rotation can be accomplished by electromechanical or electronic means. 2.3.6.1 Fixed in azimuth 2.3.6.2 Adjustable in azimuth 30 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 2.3.6.3 Fixed in elevation 2.3.6.4 Adjustable in elevation 2.3.6.5 Fixed in azimuth and elevation 2.3.6.6 Direction finder, radio goniometer or beacon 2.3.6.7 Rotation See symbols 14.2.3, 14.2.4 and 14.2.4.1; see Note 2.3.6B 2.3.7 Application: antenna with qualifying symbols and notes 2.3.7.1 Antenna with direction of radiation fixed in azimuth 2.3.7.2 Antenna with direction of radiation adjustable in azimuth 2.3.7.3 Antenna with direction of radiation fixed in azimuth, horizontal polarization 31 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.3.7.4 Antenna with adjustable directivity in elevation 2.3.7.5 Direction finding, radio goniometer, or radio beacon antenna 2.3.7.6 Antenna with direction of radiation fixed in azimuth, vertically polarized, with horizontal polar diagram |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.3.7.7 Radar antenna, rotating 4 times per minute in azimuth and reciprocating in elevation, 0° to 57° to 0° in one second F ; pad (general) -- || ||| || || 2.4.1 Fixed attenuator | | |||| | | 2.4 Attenuator 2.4.2 Balanced, general 32 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 2.4.3 Unbalanced, general 2.4.4 Variable attenuator F (general) 2.4.5 Balanced, general 2.4.6 Unbalanced, general 2.5 Battery The long line is always positive, but polarity may be indicated in addition. Example: 2.5.1 Generalized direct-current source |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.5.2 One cell 33 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 2.5.3 Multicell IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.5.4 Multicell battery with 3 taps 2.5.5 Multicell battery with adjustable tap 2.6 Delay Function Delay Line F Slow-Wave Structure 2.6.1 Delay element, general NOTES: 2.6.1A — Length of delay may be indicated. Asterisk is not part of symbol. 2.6.1B — The two vertical lines indicate input side. 2.6.2 Tapped delay element -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 34 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.6.3 Variable delay element -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 2.6.4 Slow-wave structure 2.7 Oscillator Generalized Alternating-Current Source 2.8 Permanent Magnet F 2.9 Pickup Head 2.9.1 3 General 2.9.2 3 Writing; recording; head, sound-recorder 3 F The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 35 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.9.3 4 Reading; playback; head, sound-reproducer 2.9.4 4 Erasing; magnetic eraser F F 2.9.5 4 Application: writing, reading, and erasing -- 2.9.6 4 Stereo || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.10 Piezoelectric Crystal Unit (including Crystal Unit, Quartz 2.11 Transducer F Accelerometer F Motional Pickup Transducer F ) F Use only if a more specific symbol is not applicable, e.g., tachometer generator, microphone, motor, loudspeaker, etc. For other measuring transducers, see Hall Generator (8.9) and Thermal Converter (12.1) 2.11.1 General, electrical output 4 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 36 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS 2.12 Squib, Electric IEEE Std 315-1975 F |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.12.1 Explosive -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 2.12.2 Igniter 2.12.3 Sensing link; fusible link, ambient-temperature operated Avoid conflict with symbol 3.6.4 if used on the same diagram 2.13 Thermocouple (dissimilar-metals device) 2.13.1 Temperature-measuring 2.13.2 Current-measuring NOTE — 2.13.2A: Explanatory words and arrows are not part of the symbols shown. 2.13.2.1 With integral heater internally connected 2.13.2.2 With integral insulated heater See paragraph A4.11 of the introduction 37 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.13.3 Thermopile 2.14 Thermal Element Thermomechanical Transducer Actuating device, self-heating or with external heater. (Not operated primarily by ambient temperature.) See item 9.1 for fuses, one-time devices. See item 4.30.5 for thermally operated relay. 2.15 Spark Gap Igniter Gap USE SYMBOL 9.3.1 2.16 Continuous Loop Fire Detector (temperature sensor) 2.17 Ignitor Plug 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. -- 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. | | |||| | | NOTES: || ||| || || Semiconductor Thermocouple (item 8.8) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Cross References 38 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 3. Graphic Symbols for Transmission Path 3.1 Transmission Path Conductor Cable Wiring 3.1.1 Guided path, general A single line represents the entire group of conductors or the transmission path needed to guide the power or signal. For coaxial and waveguide work, the recognition symbol is used at the beginning and end of each kind of transmission path and at intermediate points as needed for clarity. In waveguide work, mode may be indicated. IEC When required, the length between two significant points may be indicated, e.g., λ/4. IEC When required, details of structure (e.g., elbow), type, impedance, ratings, etc, may be added adjacent to or within any symbol or in a note. IEC See also item 3.2.1 3.1.1.1 Bus bar (with connections shown) -- Use only if essential to distinguish bus from other circuit paths. || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.1.2 Conductive path or conductor; wire 3.1.2.1 Two conductors or conductive paths 3.1.2.2 Three conductors or conductive paths 39 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 3.1.2.3 “n” conductors or conductive paths NOTE — 3.1.2.3A: The “n” is not part of the symbol. A number representing the actual number of paths shall be substituted for “n”. 3.1.3 Air or space path See also symbol 3.2.6 3.1.4 Dielectric path other than air Commonly used for coaxial and waveguide transmission. 3.1.5 Crossing of paths or conductors not connected The crossing is not necessarily at a 90-degree angle. 3.1.6 Junction of paths or conductors 3.1.6.1 Junction (if desired) 3.1.6.2 Application: junction of paths, conductors, or cables. If desired, indicate path type, or size 40 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.1.6.3 Application: junction of connected paths, conductors, or wires For microwave circuits, the type of coupling, power-division proportions, reflection coefficients, plane of junction, etc., may be indicated if desired. 3.1.6.4 Splice (if desired) of same size cables. Junction of conductors of same size or different size cables. If desired, indicate sizes of conductors 3.1.6.5 Conductor junction (such as hermaphroditic connectors) 3.1.7 Associated conductors 3.1.7.1 General (shown with 3 conductors) 3.1.7.2 Twisted (shown with 2 twisted conductors) NOTE — 3.1.7.2A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always replace the asterisk by one of the following letters: P T = Pair = Triple 41 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 3.1.7.3 Quad 3.1.7.4 Shielded (shown with 3 conductors out of 7 within shield) 3.1.8 Assembled conductors; cable Commonly used in communication diagrams. 3.1.8.1 Shielded single conductor 3.1.8.2 Application: shielded 5-conductor cable 42 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 3.1.8.3 Application: shielded 5-conductor cable with conductors separated on the diagram for convenience 3.1.8.4 Application: shielded 2-conductor cable with shield grounded -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.1.8.5 2-conductor cable 3.1.8.6 Application: 5-conductor cable 3.1.9 5 Coaxial cable, recognition symbol; coaxial transmission path; radio-frequency cable F (coaxial) NOTES: 3.1.9A — If necessary for clarity, an outer-conductor connection shall be made to the symbol. 3.1.9B — If the coaxial structure is not maintained, the tangential line shall be drawn only on the coaxial side. 3.1.9.1 5 General 5 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 43 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 3.1.9.2 Application: coaxial structure not maintained on the right 3.1.9.3 6 Two conductors (balanced) with one outer-conductor connection (twinax) See Note 3.1.9A |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.1.9.4 6 One conductor with one outer-conductor connection and one shielded connection (triax) See Note 3.1.9A | | |||| | | 3.1.10 Grouping of leads || ||| || || 3.1.10.1 General -- Bend of line indicates direction in which other ends of path will be found. 3.1.10.2 Interrupted (on diagram), shown with individual paths at each side of diagrammatic interruption. The lower symbol consists of long dashes. 6 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 44 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 3.1.11 Interrupted path Symbol normally used only when required for complex or special-purpose diagrams. NOTES: 3.1.11A — To ensure continuity, the interrupted-path break points must be in alignment. 3.1.11B — The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Identifying values, letters, numbers, or marks shall replace the asterisk. 3.1.12 Conductor or cable end, not connected |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.1.12.1 With end especially insulated || ||| || || | | |||| | | 3.2 Distribution Lines Transmission Lines Commonly used on system diagrams, maps, and charts. -- 3.2.1 Type of circuit USE SYMBOL 3.1.1 The following letters may be used to indicate type of transmission: F S T V telephony IEC sound (television) IEC telegraphy transmission of data IEC video (television) IEC 45 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 3.2.1.1 Application: telephone line 3.2.2 Cable underground; underground line These are long dashes. Avoid conflict with symbol 3.2.6 if used on the same diagram. 3.2.3 Submarine line; underwater line 3.2.4 Overhead line Avoid conflict with symbol 3.6.1 if used on the same diagram. 3.2.5 Loaded line Avoid conflict with symbol 6.4.18 if used on the same diagram. 3.2.6 Radio link Use only if essential to distinguish radio links or any radio portion of a circuit. Avoid conflict with symbol 3.2.2 if used on the same diagram. These are long dashes. 46 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 3.2.6.1 Application: radio link (with antenna shown) 3.2.6.2 Application: radio link carrying television (video with sound) and telephony (with antenna shown) 3.3 Alternative or Conditional Wiring The arrowheads in this case shall be solid. NOTE — 3.3A: A note shall explain the connections. See Note 3.3A |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.3.1 Application: 3 alternative paths | | |||| | | See Note 3.3A || ||| || || 3.4 Associated or Future See also paragraph A4.10 of the Introduction -- These are short dashes. 47 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 3.5 Intentional Isolation of Direct-Current Path in Coaxial or Waveguide Applications 3.6 Waveguide F The mode of propagation or other special characteristics may be shown at the side of the waveguide symbol. 3.6.1 Circular, recognition symbol Avoid conflict with symbol 3.2.4 if used on the same diagram. 3.6.2 Rectangular, recognition symbol 3.6.2.1 Dielectric-filled metallic rectangular waveguide 3.6.2.2 Solid-dielectric rectangular waveguide 3.6.2.3 Gas-filled rectangular waveguide |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.6.3 Coaxial waveguide -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | See also item 3.1.9 48 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 3.6.4 Flexible waveguide Avoid conflict with symbol 2.12.3 if used on the same diagram. 3.6.5 Twisted waveguide 3.6.6 Ridged waveguide 3.6.7 Goubau line (single-wire transmission line within solid dielectric) 3.7 Strip-Type Transmission Line | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.7.1 Unbalanced stripline -- || ||| || || 3.7.2 Balanced stripline 3.8 Termination Commonly used on coaxial and waveguide diagrams. 3.8.1 Open circuit (open). Not a fault. 49 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 3.8.2 Short circuit (short). Not a fault. NOTE — 3.8.2A: Use of the dot is optional. 3.8.3 Application: movable short circuit 3.9 Circuit Return 3.9.1 Ground, general symbol NOTE — 3.9.1A: Supplementary information may be added to define the status or purpose of the earth if this is not readily apparent. 1) 2) A direct conducting connection to the earth or body of water that is a part thereof. A conducting connection to a structure that serves a function similar to that of an earth ground (that is, a structure such as a frame of an air, space, or land vehicle that is not conductively connected to earth). 3.9.1.1 Low-noise ground (IEC) noiseless, clean earth) 3.9.1.2 Safety or protective ground NOTE — 3.9.1.2A: This symbol may be used in place of symbol 3.9.1 to indicate a ground connection having a specified protective function (e.g., for protection against electrical shock in case of a fault). 3.9.2 Chassis or frame connection; equivalent chassis connection (of printed-wiring boards) A conducting connection to a chassis or frame, or equivalent chassis connection of a printed-wiring board. The chassis or frame (or equivalent chassis connection of a printed-wiring board) may be at substantial potential with respect to the earth or structure in which this chassis or frame (or printed-wiring board) is mounted. 50 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 3.9.3 Common connections Conducting connections made to one another. All like-designated points are connected. NOTE — 3.9.3A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Identifying values, letters, numbers, or marks shall replace the asterisk. For the triangular symbol, this identification shall be placed within the triangle or, if essential for legibility, adjacent to the triangle. 3.9.3.1 Specific potential difference To be used when there is a specific potential difference with respect to a potential reference level. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.9.3.2 Potential level not specified by a numerical value || ||| || || | | |||| | | To be used when identically annotated common-return connections are at the same potential level. -- 3.10 Pressure Tight Bulkhead Cable Gland Cable Sealing End NOTE — 3.10A: The high pressure side is to the right of the trapezoid, thus retaining gland. Cross References NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 51 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4. Graphic Symbols for Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays 4.1 Switching Function NOTE — 4.1A: Switching function symbols are suitable for use on “detached contact” diagrams, but may be used in other applications. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.1.1 Conducting, closed contact (break) | | |||| | | 4.1.2 Nonconducting, open contact (make) -- || ||| || || 4.1.3 Application: transfer 4.2 Electrical Contact F For buildups or forms using electrical contacts, see applications under 5.3.5 and 5.3.6. See paragraph A4.6 of the Introduction 4.2.1 Fixed contact 4.2.1.1 Fixed contact for jack, key, relay, switch, etc See also symbol 4.2.1.2 4.2.1.2 Fixed contact with momentary contact (automatic return) NOTE — 4.2.1.2A: When this symbol (representing a contact with automatic return) is used on a diagram for international use, the convention should be so noted on the diagram or associated documentation. IEC See also 4.9 and 4.11 52 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 4.2.1.3 7 Sleeve 4.2.2 Moving Contact 4.2.2.1 Adjustable or sliding contact for resistor, inductor, etc 4.2.2.2 Locking 4.2.2.3 Nonlocking 4.2.2.4 Segment; bridging contact -- See also items 4.13.3 and 4.13.4 || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.2.2.5 Vibrator reed 4.2.2.6 Vibrator split reed 4.2.2.7 Rotating contact (slip ring) and brush 7 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 53 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.3 Basic Contact Assemblies The standard method of showing a contact is by a symbol indicating the circuit condition it produces when the actuating device is in the deenergized or nonoperated position. The actuating device may be of a mechanical, electrical, or other nature, and a clarifying note may be necessary with the symbol to explain the proper point at which the contact functions; for example, the point where a contact closes or opens as a function of changing pressure, level, flow, voltage, current, etc. In cases where it is desirable to show contacts in the energized or operated condition and where confusion may result, a clarifying note shall be added to the drawing. Auxiliary switches or contacts for circuit breakers, etc, may be designated as follows: a) b) Closed when device is energized or operated position. Closed when device is in deenergized or nonoperated position. aa) Closed when operating mechanism of main device is in energized or operated position. bb) Closed when operated mechanism of main device is in deenergized or nonoperated position. See American national Standard Manual and Automatic Station Control, Supervisory, and Associated Telemetering Equipment, C37.2-1970, for further details. In the parallel-line contact symbols shown below, the length of the parallel lines shall be approximately 11/4 times the width of the gap (except for symbol 4.3.7). 4.3.1 Closed contact (break) 4.3.2 Open contact (make) 54 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 4.3.3 Transfer 4.3.4 Make-before-break 4.3.5 Application: open contact with time closing (TC) or time-delay closing (TDC) feature 4.3.6 Application: closed contact with time opening (TO) or time-delay opening (TDO) feature 55 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.3.7 Time sequential closing 4.3.8 Multiway transfer switch 4.3.8.1 Two-position switch (90° step) -|| ||| || || 4.3.8.2 Three-position switch (120° step) | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.3.8.3 Four-position switch (45° step) 56 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS 4.4 8 Magnetic Blowout Coil 4.5 Operating Coil Relay Coil IEEE Std 315-1975 F F See also INDUCTOR; WINDING; etc (item 6.2) NOTE — 4.5A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always replace the asterisk by a device designation. See, for example, ANSI C37.2-1970. 4.5.1 Semicircular dot indicates inner end of winding 4.5.2 Application: multiwinding coil (2 windings shown) NOTE — 4.5.2A: The ends of a given winding shall be shown directly opposite each other on opposite sides of the core, or adjacent to each other on the same side of the core. 8 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 57 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 4.5.3 Electromagnetic actuator GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR F (solenoid), with mechanical linkage shown NOTE — 4.5.3A: The mechanical linkage may be omitted if the intent is clear. 4.6 Switch See also FUSE (item 9.1); and paragraphs A4.7 and A4.9 of the Introduction Fundamentals symbols for contacts, mechanical connections, etc, may be used for switch symbols. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | The standard method of showing switches is in a position with no operating force applied. For switches that may be in any of two or more positions with no operating force applied, and for switches actuated by some mechanical device (as in air-pressure, liquid-level, rate-of-flow, etc, switches), a clarifying note may be necessary to explain the point at which the switch functions. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- When the basic switch symbols in items 4.6.1 through 4.6.3 are shown in the closed position on a diagram, terminals must be added for clarity. 4.6.1 Single-throw, general 4.6.2 Double-throw, general 4.6.2.1 Application: 2-pole double-throw switch with terminals shown 58 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS 4.6.3 Knife switch F IEEE Std 315-1975 , general 4.6.4 Application: 3-pole double-throw knife switch with auxiliary contacts and terminals 4.6.5 Application: 2-pole field-discharge knife switch with terminals and discharge resistor NOTE — 4.6.5A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always add identification within or adjacent to the rectangle. *See Note 4.6.5A 4.6.6 Switch with horn gap 4.6.7 Sector switch F 4.7 Pushbutton F , Momentary or Spring-Return 4.7.1 Circuit closing (make) Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 59 IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.7.2 Circuit opening (break) 4.7.3 Two-circuit 4.8 Two-circuit, Maintained or Not Spring-Return 4.9 Nonlocking Switch, Momentary or Spring-Return The symbols to the left are commonly used for spring buildups in key switches, relays, and jacks. The symbols to the right are commonly used for toggle switches. 4.9.1 Circuit closing (make) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.9.2 Circuit opening (break) 4.9.3 Two-circuit -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | See Note 14.1.1A 60 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 4.9.4 Transfer 4.9.5 Make-before-break 4.10 Locking Switch |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- The symbols to the left are commonly used for spring buildups in key switches and jacks. The symbols to the right are commonly used for toggle switches. || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.10.1 Circuit closing (make) -- 4.10.2 Circuit opening (break) 4.10.3 Transfer, 2-position 4.10.4 Transfer, 3-position 4.10.5 Make-before-break 61 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.11 Combination Locking and Nonlocking Switch Commonly used for toggle switches 4.11.1 3-position, 1-pole: circuit closing (make), off, momentary circuit closing (make) 4.11.2 3-position, 2-pole: circuit closing (make), off, momentary circuit closing (make) 4.12 Key-Type Switch Lever Switch F 4.12.1 2-position with locking transfer and break contacts 4.12.2 3-position with nonlocking transfer and locking break contacts 62 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.12.3 3-position, multicontact combination -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.12.4 2-position, half of key switch normally operated, multicontact combination 4.13 Selector or Multiposition Switch The position in which the switch is shown may be indicated by a note or designation of switch position. 4.13.1 General (for power and control diagrams) Any number of transmission paths may be shown. 63 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.13.2 Break-before-make, nonshorting (nonbridging) during contact transfer 4.13.3 Make-before-break, shorting (bridging) during contact transfer 4.13.4 Segmental contact 4.13.5 22-point selector switch 4.13.6 10-point selector switch with fixed segment 4.13.7 Rotary (section-, deck-, or wafer-type) F Viewed from end opposite control knob or actuator unless otherwise indicated. For more than one section, the first section is the one nearest control knob or actuator. When contacts are on both sides, front contacts are nearest control knob. 64 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS 4.13.8 Slide switch F IEEE Std 315-1975 , typical ladder-type interlock In the example, one slide is shown operated. Slides are shown in released position unless otherwise noted. 4.13.9 Master or control switch A table of contact operation must be shown on the diagram. A typical table is shown below. 4.13.10 Master or control switch (cam-operated contact assembly), 6-circuit 3-point reversing switch A table of contact operation must be shown on the diagram. A typical table is shown below. Tabulate special features in note. 65 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.13.11 Drum switch, sliding-contact type, typical example 4.14 Limit Switch Sensitive Switch F NOTE — 4.14A: Identify by LS or other suitable note. 4.14.1 Track-type, circuit-closing contact 4.14.2 Track-type, circuit-opening contact 4.14.3 Lead-screw type, circuit-opening contacts 66 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 4.14.4 Rotary-type 4.14.5 Limit switch, directly actuated, spring returned 4.14.5.1 Normally open 4.14.5.2 Normally open—held closed 4.14.5.3 Normally closed 4.14.5.4 Normally closed—held open 4.15 Safety Interlock If specific type identification is not required, use applicable standard symbol. 4.15.1 If specific type identification is required: circuit opening 4.15.2 If specific type identification is required: circuit closing 67 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.16 Switches with Time-Delay Feature NOTE — 4.16A: The point of the arrow indicates the direction of switch operation in which contact action is delayed. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.16.1 Open switch with time-delay closing (TDC) feature -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.16.2 Closed switch with time-delay opening (TDO) feature 4.16.3 Open switch with time-delay opening (TDO) feature 4.16.4 Closed switch with time-delay closing (TDC) feature 68 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 4.17 Flow-Actuated Switch 4.17.1 Closes on increase in flow. -|| ||| || || 4.17.2 Opens on increase in flow | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.18 Liquid-Level-Actuated Switch 4.18.1 Closes on rising level 4.18.2 Opens on rising level 4.19 Pressure- or Vacuum-Actuated Switch 4.19.1 Closes on rising pressure 4.19.2 Opens on rising pressure 69 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.20 Temperature-Actuated Switch |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.20.1 Closes on rising temperature -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.20.2 Opens on rising temperature 4.21 Thermostat NOTES: 4.21A — The t° symbol shall be shown or be replaced by data giving the nominal or specific operating temperature of the device. 4.21B — If clarification of direction of contact operation is needed, a directional arrow may be added. The arrowhead shall point in the direction of rising temperature operation. A directional arrow shall always be shown for central-off (neutral) position devices. 4.21.1 Closes on rising temperature 4.21.1.1 With contact-motion direction clarified 4.21.2 Opens on rising temperature 70 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 4.21.3 Transfers on rising temperature 4.21.4 Transfer, with intended central-off (neutral) position 4.21.5 Application: multifunction, typical See notes 4.21A and B 4.21.6 With integral heater and transfer contacts Use only if essential to indicate integral heater details. 4.21.7 Application: with operating temperatures indicated 4.22 Flasher Self-Interrupting Switch Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 71 IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.23 Foot-Operated Switch Foot Switch F 4.23.1 Opens by foot pressure 4.23.2 Closes by foot pressure 4.24 Switch Operated by Shaft Rotation and Responsive to Speed or Direction See also item 4.27 4.24.1 Speed 4.24.2 Plugging: to stop drive after it has come practically to rest | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.24.3 Anti-plugging: to prevent plugging of drive || ||| || || 4.24.4 Centrifugal switch (opening on increasing speed) -- See also symbol 14.2.6 72 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.25 Switches with Specific Features |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.25.1 Hook switch F 4.25.2 Telephone dial F (switch) 4.25.3 Switch in evacuated envelope, 1-pole double-throw 4.25.4 Mushroom-head safety feature Application to 2-circuit pushbutton switch. 4.25.5 Key-operated lock switch Use appropriate standard symbol and add key designation or other information in note. 4.26 Telegraph Key F 4.26.1 Simple 73 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.26.2 Simple with shorting switch 4.26.3 Open-circuit or pole-changing 4.27 Governor F (Contact-making) Speed Regulator Contacts open or closed as required (shown here as closed). 4.28 Vibrator, Interrupter F -- 4.28.1 Typical shunt drive (with terminals shown) || ||| || || Show contacts as required. | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.28.2 Typical separate drive (with terminals shown) Show contacts as required. 4.29 Contactor See also CIRCUIT BREAKER (item 9.4) 74 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Fundamental symbols for contacts, coils, mechanical connections, etc, are the basis of contactor symbols and should be used to represent contactors on complete diagrams. Complete diagrams of contactors consist of combinations of fundamental symbols for control coils, mechanical connections, etc, in such configurations as to represent the actual device. Mechanical interlocking should be indicated by notes. 4.29.1 Manually operated 3-pole contactor 4.29.2 Electrically operated 1-pole contactor with series blowout coil 4.29.3 Electrically operated 3-pole contactor with series blowout coils; 2 open and 1 closed auxiliary contacts (shown smaller than the main contacts) 4.29.4 Electrically operated 1-pole contactor with shunt blowout coil 75 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 4.30 Relay GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR F See OPERATING COIL; RELAY COIL (item 4.5) Fundamental symbols for contacts, mechanical connections, coils, etc, are the basis of relay symbols and should be used to represent relays on complete diagrams. The following letter combinations or symbol elements may be used with relay symbols. The requisite number of these letters or symbol elements may be used to show what special features a relay possesses The terms “slow” and “fast” are relative, and the degree is not to be noted by a multiplicity of the same relay symbol on a diagram. Relays that are direct-current operated are not marked to indicate dc operation. The proper poling for a polarized relay shall be shown by the use of + and - designations applied to the winding leads. The interpretation of this shall be that a voltage applied with the polarity as indicated shall cause the armature to move toward the contact shown nearer the coil on the diagram. If the relay is equipped with numbered terminals, the proper terminal numbers shall also be shown. 4.30.1 Basic 76 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 4.30.2 Application: relay with transfer contacts 4.30.3 Application: polarized relay with transfer contacts (two typical types shown) 4.30.4 Application: polarized (no bias) marginal relay with transfer contacts -|| ||| || || 4.30.5 Relay, thermally operated | | |||| | | 4.30.5.1 Activating device for thermally operated relay |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Time of delay may be shown. Contacts may be shown separately from the operating device. See also item 2.14 77 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.30.5.2 With normally open contacts shown (two typical types) -- || ||| || || 4.30.5.3 With transfer contacts shown 4.30.6 Thermal relay, one-time type, not reusable Normally open contact type shown. 4.31 Inertia Switch (operated by sudden deceleration) NOTE — 4.31A: This symbol is commonly used on diagrams for aerospace applications. 4.32 Mercury Switch 4.32.1 Leveling 4.32.1.1 Three terminal 4.32.1.2 Four terminal 78 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 4.32.2 With acceleration cutoff (four terminal) 4.33 Aneroid Capsule (air pressure) Operated Switch Cross References Protective Relay (item 9.5) NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 5. Graphic Symbols for Terminals and Connectors 5.1 Terminals 5.1.1 Circuit terminal 5.1.1.1 Terminal board F or terminal strip, with 4 terminals shown; group of 4 terminals Number and arrangement as convenient. NOTE — 5.1.1.1A: Internal lines and terminals may be omitted if terminal identifications are shown within the symbol. 79 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR See Note 5.1.1.1A 5.1.2 Terminals for electron tubes, semiconductor devices, etc Used primarily in application-data terminal diagrams for electron tubes, semiconductor devices, and other devices having terminations of similar type. NOTES: 5.1.2A — Explanatory words and arrows are not part of the symbol. 5.1.2B — The following letter combinations, if shown adjacent to terminal symbols requiring special attention, shall signify the following: S Connection to an external shield integral with a device (including metal tube shell, base sleeve or shell; external conductive coating or casing). Not to be used if the external conductive coating serves as one side of a capacitor (as in cathode-ray tubes) and is not designed to function as an electrostatic shield. IC Internal connection: not intended to be used for circuit connection. IS Internal shield not depicted in terminal diagram. 5.1.2.1 Base-pin terminals (electron tubes, etc); pin terminals (semiconductor devices, etc) See Note 5.1.2A 5.1.2.2 Envelope terminals 1) -- || ||| || || 2) Any metallic envelope or external conductive coating or casing that has a contact area (as in cathode-ray tubes, disc-seal tubes, pencil tubes, etc). Mounting flange or stud when it serves as a terminal. | | |||| | | The rigid-terminal symbol is used to indicate customary rigid terminals (caps, rods, rings, etc) as well as to indicate: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- See Note 5.1.2A 80 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 5.1.2.3 Device with base-orientation key See Note 5.1.2A 5.1.2.4 Devices with reference point (such as a boss, colored dot, index pin, index tab, or bayonet pin) 5.1.2.5 Terminals connected to metallic envelope or enclosure 5.2 Cable Termination Line shown on left of symbol indicates cable. 5.3 Connector Disconnecting Device Jack F Plug F The contact symbol is not an arrowhead. It is larger and the lines are drawn at a 90-degree angle. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 5.3.1 Female contact -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 5.3.2 Male contact 81 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 5.3.3 Connector assembly, movable or stationary portion; jack, plug, or receptacle NOTE — 5.3.3A: Use appropriate number of contact symbols. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 5.3.3.1 Receptacle or jack (usually stationary) NOTE — 5.3.3.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. If desired, indicate the type of contacts: male (→) or female ( ). 5.3.3.2 Plug (usually movable) 5.3.4 Separable connectors (engaged) 5.3.4.1 Application: engaged 4-conductors (female plug male receptacle shown) 82 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 5.3.4.2 Application: engaged 4-conductor connectors; the plug has 1 male and 3 female contacts with individual contact designations shown in the complete-symbol column 5.3.5 Communication switchboard-type connector See also symbol 4.2.1.4 5.3.5.1 2-conductor (jack) 5.3.5.2 2-conductor (plug) -- 5.3.5.3 9 3-conductor (jack) with 2 break contacts (normals) and 1 auxiliary make contact || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 5.3.5.4 3-conductor (plug) 5.3.6 Communication switchboard-type connector with circuit normalled through “Normalled” indicates that a through circuit may be interrupted by an inserted connector. As shown here, the inserted connector opens the through circuit and connects to the circuit towards the left. Items 5.3.6.1 through 5.3.6.4 show 2-conductor jacks. The “normal” symbol is applicable to other types of connectors. See also symbol 4.2.1.3 9 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 83 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 5.3.6.1 Jacks with circuit normalled through one way 5.3.6.2 Jacks with circuit normalled through both ways 5.3.6.3 Jacks in multiple, one set with circuit normalled through both ways -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 5.3.6.4 Jacks with auxiliary contacts, with circuit normalled through both ways 5.4 Connectors of the Type Commonly Used for Power-Supply Purposes (convenience outlets and mating connectors). American National Standard Dimensions of Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. C73.10-1966 (R1972) through C73.68-1966 (R1972). See also symbols 5.3.3.1 and 5.3.3.2 The following symbols are primarily for applications where the type of connector must be indicated semipictorially. Contacts and contact arrangements shall be shown in simplified form as viewed from the mating face, approximately in proportion to the arrangement in the physical item. A simplified-shape outline shall surround the contact symbols. 5.4.1 Male contact Filled outline, approximating contact end-view (3 typical forms are shown) 84 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 5.4.2 Female contact Open outline, approximating limiting shape of mating male contact (3 typical forms are shown) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 5.4.3 Application: 2-conductor nonpolarized connector with male contacts (3 typical forms are shown) -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 5.4.4 Application: 2-conductor nonpolarized connector with female contacts (3 typical forms are shown) 5.4.5 Application: 2-conductor polarized connector (2 typical forms with female contacts are shown) 5.4.6 Application: 3-conductor polarized connector (5 typical forms with female contacts are shown) 5.4.7 Application: 4-conductor polarized connector (2 typical forms with female contacts are shown) 85 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 5.5 Test Block 5.5.1 Female portion with short-circuiting bar (with terminals shown) 5.5.2 Male portion (with terminals shown) 5.6 Coaxial Connector Coaxial Junction 5.6.1 Engaged coaxial connectors Coaxial recognition symbol may be added if necessary. See COAXIAL TRANSMISSION PATH (item 3.1.9) 5.6.2 Application: coaxial with the outside conductor shown carried through 5.6.3 Application: coaxial with center conductor shown carried through; with outside conductor terminated on chassis 5.6.4 Application: coaxial with center conductor shown carried through; outside conductor not carried through 5.6.5 Application: T or Y adapter with outer conductor carried through 86 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 5.7 Waveguide Flanges Waveguide Junction 5.7.1 Mated pair of symmetrical waveguide connectors 5.7.2 Mated pair of asymmetrical waveguide connectors The line is not interrupted at the junction whether or not it is a plain-type or choke-type connection. 5.7.3 Plain (rectangular waveguide) 5.7.4 Choke (rectangular waveguide) 5.7.5 Application: rectangular waveguide with mated plain and choke flanges with direct-current isolation (insulation) between sections of waveguide Cross References NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 87 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6. Graphic Symbols for Transformers, Inductors, and Windings 6.1 Core 6.1.1 General or air core If it is necessary to identify an air core, a note should appear adjacent to the symbol of the inductor or transformer NO SYMBOL 6.1.2 Magnetic core of inductor or transformer Not to be used unless it is necessary to identify a magnetic core. 6.1.3 Core of magnet For use if representation of the core is necessary. See PERMANENT MAGNET (item 2.8) 6.1.4 Magnetic-memory core Commonly used in magnetic-memory and magnetic channel-selector devices. See also item 15.18. 6.1.4.1 Single-aperture type with windings shown 6.1.4.2 Application: in an array having four windings—two WRITE-READ windings, one INHIBIT winding, and one SENSE winding -|| ||| || || NOTE — 6.1.4.2A: Words are for explanation and are not part of the symbol. | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 88 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 6.2 Inductor Winding (machine or transformer) Reactor Radio-Frequency Coil Telephone Retardation Coil See also OPERATING COIL (item 4.5) For polarity markings see item 1.6.3 6.2.1 General NOTE — 6.2.1A: This symbol is deprecated and should not be used on new schematics. 6.2.2 Magnetic-core inductor Telephone loading coil If necessary to show a magnetic core. 6.2.3 Tapped 6.2.4 Adjustable inductor 6.2.5 Adjustable or continuously adjustable inductor -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 6.2.6 Shunt inductor |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.2.7 Inductive termination Commonly used in coaxial and waveguide diagrams. 89 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.2.7.1 Application: series inductor and path open 6.2.7.2 Application: series inductor and path short-circuited 6.2.8 Carrier line trap (carrier elimination filter) 6.2.8.1 General NOTE — 6.2.8.1A: If it is essential to indicate the following characteristics, the specified letter or letters may be inserted within or placed adjacent to the symbol. 2f WB NB Two frequency Wide band Narrow band 6.2.9 Coil operated flag indicator 6.3 Transductor Saturable-Core Inductor Saturable-Core Reactor -- NOTES: || ||| || || 6.3A — If essential for clarity, the magnetic core symbol, 6.1.2, may be added where applicable. | | |||| | | 6.3B — Power windings are drawn with three scallops or loops, control windings with five. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.3C — The saturable-properties indicator, symbol 1.2.4, may also be used to indicate two or more windings. 6.3.1 Transductor element, assembled When windings are separated on a drawing, suitable indication shall be provided to show that they are on the same core. 90 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 6.3.2 Application: single-phase series transductor with winding-polarity and kind-of-current markings shown NOTE — 6.3.2A: An increase of current entering the end of the control winding marked with a dot causes an increase in the power output. See Notes 6.3B and C 6.3.3 Application: single-phase parallel transductor with winding-polarity and kind-of-current markings shown 6.3.4 Application: self-exciting transductor with two control circuits and kind-of-current markings shown 6.3.5 Application: transductor with direct-current output and kind-of-current markings shown 91 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.4 Transformer F Telephone Induction Coil Telephone Repeating Coil 6.4.1 General Additional windings may be shown or indicated by a note. For polarity markings on current and potential transformers, see symbol 1.6.3. In coaxial and waveguide circuits, this symbol represents a taper or step transformer without mode change. NOTE — 6.4.1A: This symbol is the preferred symbol from IEC Publication 117, Recommended Graphical Symbols. It should be used on schematics for equipments having international usage, especially when the equipment will be marked using this symbol (in accordance with IEC Publication 417, Graphical Symbols for Use on Equipment). -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.4.1.1 Application: transformer with direct-current connections and mode suppression between two rectangular waveguides 6.4.2 Magnetic-core transformer If necessary to show a magnetic core. 6.4.2.1 Nonsaturating 6.4.2.2 Application: shielded transformer with magnetic core shown 92 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 6.4.2.3 Application: transformer with magnetic core shown and with an electrostatic shield between windings. The shield is shown connected to the frame. 6.4.3 Saturating transformer See SATURABLE-PROPERTIES INDICATOR (symbol 1.2.4) -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.4.4 One winding with adjustable inductance 6.4.5 Each winding with separately adjustable inductance 93 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.4.6 Adjustable mutual inductor; constant-current transformer 6.4.7 With taps, 1-phase 6.4.8 Autotransformer, 1-phase 6.4.9 Adjustable 6.4.10 Step-voltage regulator or load-ratio control autotransformer 94 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 6.4.10.1 Step-voltage regulator 6.4.10.2 Load-ratio control auto-transformer 6.4.11 Load-ratio control transformer with taps 6.4.12 1-phase induction voltage regulator(s) Number of regulators may be written adjacent to the symbol. 95 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.4.13 Triplex induction voltage regulator 6.4.14 3-phase induction voltage regulator 6.4.15 1-phase, 2-winding transformer 96 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 6.4.15.1 Application: 3-phase bank of 1-phase, 2-winding transformers with wye-delta connections -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.4.15.2 Three phase transformer with 4 taps with wye-wye connections 97 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.4.16 Polyphase transformer -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 6.4.17 1-phase, 3-winding transformer |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 98 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 6.4.18 Current transformer(s) Avoid conflict with symbol 3.2.5 if used on the same diagram. 6.4.19 10 Bushing-type current transformer 6.4.20 Potential transformer(s) -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.4.21 Outdoor metering device 10 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 99 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.5 11 Linear Coupler Cross References NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 7. Graphic Symbols for Electron Tubes and Related Devices 7.1 Electron Tube F See also ENVELOPE; ENCLOSURE (item SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES, ETC (item 5.1.2) 1.10) and TERMINALS FOR ELECTRON TUBES, Tube-component symbols are shown first. These are followed by typical applications showing the use of these specific symbols in the various classes of devices such as thermionic, cold-cathode, and photoemissive tubes of varying structures and combinations of elements (triodes, cathode-ray tubes, etc). Lines outside of the envelope are not part of the symbol but are electrical connections thereto. -- Connections between the external circuit and electron-tube symbols within the envelope may be located as required to simplify the diagram. || ||| || || 7.1.1 Emitting electrode | | |||| | | 7.1.1.1 Directly heated (filamentary) cathode |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTE — 7.1.1.1A: Leads may be connected in any convenient manner to ends of the ∧ provided the identity of the ∧ is retained. 7.1.1.2 Indirectly heated cathode Lead may be connected to either extreme end of the 11 or, if required, to both ends, in any convenient manner. The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 100 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 7.1.1.3 Cold cathode (including ionically heated cathode) 7.1.1.4 Photocathode 7.1.1.5 Pool cathode 7.1.1.6 Ionically heated cathode with provision for supplementary heating 7.1.2 Controlling electrode 7.1.2.1 Grid (including beam-confining or beam-forming electrodes) -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 7.1.2.2 Deflecting electrodes (used in pairs); reflecting or repelling electrode (used in velocity-modulated tubes) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.1.2.3 Ignitor (in pool tubes) (should extend into pool); starter (in gas tubes) 7.1.2.4 Excitor (contactor type) 101 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 7.1.3 Collecting electrode 7.1.3.1 Anode or plate |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.1.3.2 Target or x-ray anode Drawn at about a 45-degree angle. 7.1.3.3 Fluorescent target Drawn at about a 45-degree angle. 7.1.3.4 Collector 7.1.4 Collecting and emitting electrode 7.1.4.1 Dynode 7.1.4.2 Alternately collecting and emitting electrode 7.1.4.2.1 Composite anode-photocathode 7.1.4.2.2 Composite anode-cold cathode 102 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 7.1.4.2.3 Composite anode-ionically heated cathode with provision for supplementary heating -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 7.1.5 Heater |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.1.6 Shield See symbol 7.2.10 This is understood to shield against electric fields unless otherwise noted. 7.1.6.1 Any shield against electric fields that is within the envelope and that is connected to an independent terminal 7.1.6.2 Outside envelope of x-ray tube 7.1.7 Coupling See COUPLING (item 15.2), COAXIAL TRANSMISSION PATH (item 3.1.9), and WAVEGUIDE (item 3.6) 7.1.7.1 Coupling by loop (electromagnetic type) Coupling loop may be shown inside or outside envelope as desired. 7.1.8 12 Ion-diffusion barrier, shown with envelope Commonly used with liquid-filled tubes. 12 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 103 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 7.2 General Notes 7.2.1 If new symbols are necessary, they should be formed where possible from component symbols. For example, see DYNODE (item 7.1.4.1), which combines the anode and photocathode conventions. 7.2.2 A connection to anode, dynode, pool cathode, photocathode, deflecting electrode, composite anodephotocathode, and composite anode-cold cathode shall be to the center of that symbol. Connection to any other electrode may be shown at either end or both ends of the electrode symbol. 7.2.3 A diagram for a tube having more than one heater or filament shall show only one heater or filament symbol ∧ unless they have entirely separate connections. If a heater or filament tap is made, either brought out to a terminal or internally connected to another element, it shall be connected at the vertex of the symbol, regardless of the actual division of voltage across the heater or filament. 7.2.4 Standard symbols, such as the inclined arrow for tunability and connecting dotted lines for ganged components, may be added to a tube symbol to extend the meaning of the tube symbol, provided such added feature or component is integral with the tube. 7.2.5 Electric components, such as resistors, capacitors, or inductors, which are integral parts of the tube and are important to its functional operation, shall be shown in the standard manner. 7.2.6 Multiple equipotential cathodes that are directly connected inside the tube shall be shown as a single cathode. 7.2.7 A tube having two or more grids tied internally shall be shown with symbols for each grid, except when the grids are adjacent in the tube structure. Thus, the diagram for a twin pentode having a common screen-grid connection for each section and for a converter tube having the No. 3 and No. 5 grids connected internally would show separate symbols for each grid. A triode where the control grid is physically in the form of two grid windings, however, would show only one grid. 7.2.8 A tube having a grid adjacent to a plate but internally connected to the plate to form a portion of it shall be shown as having a plate only. 7.2.9 Associated parts of a circuit, such as focusing coils, deflecting coils, field coils, etc, are not part of the tube symbol but may be added to the circuit in the form of standard symbols. For example, a resonant-type magnetron with permanent magnet may be shown as follows (see symbol 15.11.1): 7.2.10 External and internal shields, whether integral parts of tubes or not, shall be omitted from the circuit diagram unless the circuit diagram requires their inclusion. 104 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 7.2.11 In line with standard drafting practice, straight-line crossovers are recommended. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.3 Typical Applications || ||| || || | | |||| | | 7.3.1 Triode with directly heated filamentary cathode and envelope connection to base terminal -- 7.3.2 Equipotential-cathode pentode showing use of elongated envelope 7.3.3 Equipotential-cathode twin triode showing use of elongated envelope and rule of item 7.2.3. 7.3.4 Cold-cathode gas-filled tube 7.3.4.1 Rectifier; voltage regulator for direct-current operation See also symbol 11.1.3.2 7.3.5 Phototube 7.3.5.1 Single-unit, vacuum-type 105 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 7.3.5.2 Multiplier-type -|| ||| || || 7.3.6 Cathode-ray tube | | |||| | | See Note 1.10A |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.3.6.1 With electric-field (electrostatic) deflection 7.3.6.2 For electromagnetic deflection 7.3.6.2.1 Single-gun 106 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 7.3.6.2.2 Multiple-gun (three-gun shown) 7.3.7 Mercury-pool tube 7.3.7.1 With ignitor and control grid |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.3.7.2 With excitor, control grid, and holding anode -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 7.3.7.3 Single-anode pool-type vapor rectifier with ignitor 7.3.7.4 6-anode metallic-tank pool-type vapor rectifier with excitor, showing rigid-terminal symbol for control connection to tank (pool cathode is insulated from tank) Anode symbols are located as convenient. 107 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 7.3.7.5 Pool-type cathode power rectifier 7.3.8 X-ray tube 7.3.8.1 With filamentary cathode and focusing grid (cup) The anode may be cooled by fluid or radiation. 7.3.8.2 With control grid, filamentary cathode, and focusing cup 7.3.8.3 With grounded electrostatic shield -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.3.8.4 Double focus with rotating anode See item 7.2.9 7.3.8.5 With multiple accelerating electrode electrostatically and electromagnetically focused See item 7.2.9 108 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 7.3.9 Thyratron See also symbol 8.11 7.3.9.1 With indirectly heated cathode 7.4 Solion Ion-Diffusion Device -- 7.4.1 Diode solion || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.4.2 Tetrode solion NOTE — 7.4.2A: Letters in parentheses are not part of the symbol. I S R C Input Shield Readout Common 109 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 7.5 Coulomb Accumulator Electrochemical Step-Function Device NOTE — 7.5A: Letters in parentheses are not part of the symbol, but are for explanation only. For a precharged cell, with + polarity applied to P, the cell internal resistance and voltage drop will remain low until the designed coulomb quantity has passed; then the internal resistance will rise to its high value. 7.6 Conductivity Cell -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.7 Nuclear-Radiation Detector (gas-filled) Ionization Chamber Proportional Counter Tube Geiger-Müller Counter Tube NOTE — 7.7A: For other types of radiation-sensitivity indicators, see item 1.3. 7.7.1 General 7.7.2 Application: metal enclosure, having one collector connected to the enclosure 110 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Cross References Magnetron (item 15.11) Resonator (cavity-type) Tube (item 15.10) NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 8. Graphic Symbols for Semiconductor Devices 8.1 Semiconductor Device Transistor Diode See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction NOTES: 8.1A — Some semiconductor devices may be represented by either of two methods. -|| ||| || || For convenience in referring to semiconductor symbols in this section, they are classified as follows (Symbols not otherwise identified are Style 1): | | |||| | | Style 1 symbols are composed of basic element symbols depicting the internal buildup of the device. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Style 2 symbols (primarily diode devices) incorporate special-property symbols into the basic-element symbol, rather than by showing the special-property symbol adjacent to the Style 1 symbols. Style 3 symbols are composed of symbol elements representing functions of the device without regard to the method by which the function is performed within the device. 8.1B — Numbers and letters in parentheses are to correlate illustrations in the standard and are not intended to represent terminal identification. 8.1C — In general, the angle at which a lead is brought to a symbol element has no significance. IEC 8.1D — Orientation, including a mirror-image presentation, does not change the meaning of a symbol. IEC For exceptions to this rule, see item 8.3. 8.1E — The elements of the symbol must be drawn in such an order as to show clearly the operating function of the device. IEC 8.2 Element Symbols 8.2.1 Semiconductor region with one ohmic connection As shown, the horizontal line is the semiconductor region and the vertical line is an ohmic connection. 111 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR The line representing the ohmic connection shall not be drawn at the very end of the line representing the semiconductor region. 8.2.1.1 Semiconductor region with a plurality of ohmic connections Examples show 2 ohmic connections. 8.2.2 Rectifying junction or junction which influences a depletion layer Arrowheads ( ) shall be half the length of the arrow away from the semiconductor base region. IEC See item 8.6 The equilateral ( ) triangle shall be filled and shall touch the semiconductor base-region symbol. IEC NOTE — 8.2.2A: The triangle points in the direction of the forward (easy) current as indicated by a direct-current ammeter, unless otherwise noted adjacent to the symbol. Electron flow is in the opposite direction. 8.2.2.1 P region N region 8.2.2.2 N region on P region 112 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.2.3 Enhancement-type semiconductor region with plurality of ohmic connections and a rectifying junction Portions of the interrupted channel line having ohmic contacts shall be of equal length and drawn significantly longer than the center-channel section. Channel gaps shall be of equal length and approximately equal to the center-channel length. -- 8.2.4 Emitter on region of dissimilar-conductivity type || ||| || || | | |||| | | As shown, the slant line with arrow represents the emitter. Arrowheads on both the N and P emitter symbols shall be half the length of the arrow away from the semiconductor base-region symbol. IEC |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Emitter element symbols shall be drawn at an angle of approximately 60 degrees to the semiconductor base-region symbol. IEC 8.2.4.1 P emitter on N region 8.2.4.1.1 Plurality of P emitters N on region 8.2.4.2 N emitter on P region 8.2.4.2.1 Plurality of N emitters on P region 8.2.5 Collector on region of dissimilar-conductivity type As shown, the slant line represents the collector. Collector element symbols shall be drawn at an angle of approximately 60 degrees to the semiconductor base-region symbol. IEC 113 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.2.5.1 Plurality of collectors on region of dissimilar-conductivity type 8.2.6 Transition between regions of dissimilar-conductivity types, either P to N or N to P. The short slant line indicates point of change along the horizontal line from P to N or N to P. No connections shall be made to the short slant line. IEC Transition-line element symbols shall be drawn at an angle of approximately 60 degrees to the semiconductor baseregion symbol. IEC The short lines used in transition symbols shall be appreciably shorter than collector or emitter symbols. IEC 8.2.7 Intrinsic region between 2 regions The intrinsic region lies between the linked slant lines. IEC 8.2.7.1 Between regions of dissimilar-conductivity type, either PIN or NIP -- 8.2.7.2 Between regions of similar-conductivity type, either PIP or NIN || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.2.7.3 Between a collector and a region of dissimilar-conductivity type, either PIN or NIP The connection to the collector is made to the long slant line. IEC 8.2.7.4 Between a collector and a region of similar conductivity type, either PIP or NIN The connection to the collector is made to the long slant line. IEC 114 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.2.8 Insulated gate The L-shaped insulated-gate element shall be drawn with one side spaced from, and parallel to, the channel between ohmic contacts. The corner of the gate element shall be drawn opposite the preferred-source ohmic contact. 8.2.8.1 One gate For an application, see symbol 8.6.10.2 8.2.8.2 Multiple gate (2 gates shown) For an application, see symbol 8.6.10.4.1 Insulated-gate elements are drawn as long as necessary to show each gate. The insulated-gate element drawn opposite the preferred source is designated as the primary gate. Additional gates are secondary gates. 8.2.9 Gate; control electrode Applicable only to Style 3 symbols. NOTE — 8.2.9A: The gate symbol shall be drawn at an angle of approximately 30° to the axis of the basic diode symbol, and shall touch the cathode (or anode) symbol at a point approximately halfway between the center line of the symbol and the extremity of the cathode (or anode) symbol. 8.2.9.1 Gate (external connection) 8.2.9.1.1 General For application, see symbol 8.6.12.1 See Note 8.2.9A 8.2.9.1.2 Having turn-off feature For application, see symbol 8.2.12.2 This special feature shall be indicated by a short line crossing the gate lead. Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | 115 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR See Note 8.2.9A 8.2.9.2 Gate (no external connection) For application, see symbol 8.5.9 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Because there is no external connection to the gate, this lead shall not extend to the envelope symbol, if any. See Note 8.2.9A 8.3 Special-Property Indicators If necessary, a special function or property essential for circuit operation shall be indicated (a) by a supplementary symbol placed within the envelope or adjacent to the symbol, as shown in Style 1 symbols, or (b) included as part of the symbol, as shown in Style 2 symbols in item 8.5. The orientation of the Style 1 special-property indicators with respect to the basic symbol is critical. See the applications in item 8.5. 8.3.1 Breakdown Do not rotate or show in mirror-image form. 8.3.2 Tunneling 8.3.3 Backward 8.3.4 Capacitive 116 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- See also item 1.2 || ||| || || | | |||| | | See Note 8.1A ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.4 Rules for Drawing Style 1 Symbols To draw a device symbol, start at an electrode whose polarity is known (usually an emitter) and proceed along the device, showing all of its regions individually. Finally, indicate ohmic connections where required. NOTE — 8.4A: Numbers, letters, and words in parentheses are to correlate illustrations in the standard; they are not intended to represent device terminal numbering or identification and are not part of the symbol as shown in items 8.5, 8.6, 8.10, and 8.11. Name of Terminal Letter Anode A Base B Collector C Drain D Emitter E Gate G Cathode K Source Main terminal S * T Substrate (bulk) U *Used with bidirectional thyristors. The terminals are differentiated by numerical subscripts 1 and 2, T1 being the terminal to which the gate trigger signal is referenced, if applicable. 8.4.1 PNP transistor (example of a three-element device) -|| ||| || || Construction of symbol by successively using symbols 8.2.4.1, 8.2.5, and 8.2.1. | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 117 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.4.2 PNINIP device (example of a complex device with multiple emitters and bases) Construction of symbol by successively using symbols 8.2.4.1.1, 8.2.7.2, 8.2.7.3, and 8.2.1.1. 8.5 Typical Applications, Two-Terminal Devices See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction See Note 8.4A 8.5.1 Semiconductor diode; semiconductor rectifier diode; metallic rectifier | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.5.2 Capacitive diode (varactor) -- || ||| || || 8.5.3 Temperature-dependent diode 8.5.4 Photodiode See item 1.3 118 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.5.4.1 Photosensitive type 8.5.4.2 Photoemissive type See also item 11.1.1 8.5.4.3 Bidirectional photodiode; photo-duo-diode (photosensitive type) 8.5.4.3.1 NPN-type 8.5.4.3.2 PNP-type 8.5.4.4 Photosensitive type: 2-segment, with common cathode lead 8.5.4.5 Photosensitive type: 4-quadrant, with common cathode lead 119 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.5.5 Storage diode 8.5.6 Breakdown diode; overvoltage absorber See also item 9.3 8.5.6.1 Unidirectional diode; voltage regulator 8.5.6.2 Bidirectional diode 8.5.6.3 Unidirectional negative resistance breakdown diode; trigger diac 8.5.6.3.1 NPN-type 8.5.6.3.2 PNP-type 120 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.5.6.4 Bidirectional negative-resistance breakdown diode; trigger diac 8.5.6.4.1 NPN-type 8.5.6.4.2 PNP-type 8.5.7 Tunnel and backward diodes 8.5.7.1 Tunnel diode For this application, Note 8.2.2A does not apply. 8.5.7.2 Backward diode; tunnel rectifier For this application, Note 8.2.2A does not apply. Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 121 IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.5.8 Thyristor, reverse-blocking diode-type 8.5.8.1 General 8.5.8.2 Light-activated type 8.5.9 Thyristor, bidirectional diode type; bi-switch See also symbol 8.6.15 8.5.10 Phototransistor (NPN-type) (without external base connection) See also symbol 8.6.16, for 3-terminal device 122 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.5.11 Current regulator 8.5.12 PIN-type diode NOTE — 8.5.12A: Use symbol 8.5.1 unless essential to show intrinsic region. 8.5.13 Step recovery diode 8.6 Typical Applications, Three- (or more) Terminal Devices 8.6.1 PNP transistor (also PNIP transistor, if omitting the intrinsic region will not result in ambiguity) || ||| || || | | |||| | | 8.6.1.1 Application: PNP transistor with one electrode connected to envelope (in this case, the collector electrode) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction -- 8.6.2 NPN transistor (also NPIN transistor, if omitting the intrinsic region will not result in ambiguity) See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 123 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.6.2.1 Application: NPN transistor with multiple emitters (with 4 emitters shown) 8.6.3 NPN transistor with transverse-biased base See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.4 PNIP transistor with ohmic connection to the intrinsic region See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.5 NPIN transistor with ohmic connection to the intrinsic region See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.6 PNIN transistor with ohmic connection to the intrinsic region -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 124 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.6.7 NPIP transistor with ohmic connection to the intrinsic region See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.8 Unijunction transistor with N-type base See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.9 Unijunction transistor with P-type base See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.10 Field-effect transistor with N-channel (junction gate and insulated gate) 8.6.10.1 N-channel junction gate If desired, the junction-gate symbol element may be drawn opposite the preferred source. See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.10.2 N-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, passive-bulk (substrate) three-terminal device Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 125 IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.6.10.3 N-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk (substrate) internally terminated to source, three-terminal device 8.6.10.4 N-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk (substrate) externally terminated, fourterminal device 8.6.10.4.1 Application: N-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, two-gate, five-terminal device -|| ||| || || 8.6.10.5 N-channel insulated-gate, enhancement-type, single-gate, active-bulk (substrate) externally terminated, fourterminal device | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.6.10.5.1 Application: N-channel insulated-gate, enhancement-type, two-gate, five-terminal device 8.6.11 Field-effect transistor with P-channel (junction gate and insulated gate) 8.6.11.1 P-channel junction gate See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 126 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.6.11.2 P-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, passive-bulk (substrate) three-terminal device 8.6.11.3 P-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk (substrate) internally terminated to source, three-terminal device 8.6.11.4 P-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk (substrate) externally terminated, fourterminal device 8.6.11.4.1 Application: P-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, two-gate, five-terminal device 8.6.11.5 P-channel insulated-gate, enhancement-type, single-gate, active-bulk (substrate) externally terminated, fourterminal device 8.6.11.5.1 Application: P-channel insulated-gate, enhancement-type, two-gate, five-terminal device 8.6.12 Thyristor, reverse-blocking triode-type, N-type gate; semiconductor controlled rectifier, N-type gate See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 127 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.6.12.1 General -- 8.6.12.2 Gate turn-off type || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.6.13 Thyristor, reverse-blocking triode-type, P-type gate; semiconductor controlled rectifier, P-type gate See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.13.1 General 8.6.13.2 Gate turn-off type 128 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.6.14 Thyristor, reverse-blocking tetrode-type; semiconductor controlled switch 8.6.15 Thyristor, bidirectional triode-type; triac; gated switch See also symbol 8.5.9 8.6.16 Phototransistor (PNP-type) See also symbol 8.5.10, for 2-terminal device 8.6.17 Darlington transistor (NPN-type) 8.7 Photosensitive Cell See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.7.1 Asymmetrical photoconductive transducer USE SYMBOL 8.5.4.1 8.7.2 Symmetrical photoconductive transducer (resistive) USE SYMBOL 2.1.13 129 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.7.3 Photovoltaic transducer; barrier photocell; blocking-layer cell; solar cell -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.8 Semiconductor Thermocouple 8.8.1 Temperature-measuring See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.8.2 Current-measuring 8.9 Hall Element Hall Generator See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction NOTE — 8.9A: W and X are the current terminals; Y and Z are the voltage output terminals. Letters are for explanation and are not part of the symbol. If polarity markings (symbol 1.6) are shown, the direction of the magnetic field must be defined. See Note 8.9A 8.10 Photon-Coupled Isolator See also symbol 15.8.1 NOTE — 8.10A: T is the transmitter; R is the receiver. The letters are for explanation and are not part of the symbol. Explanatory information should be added to explain circuit operation. 130 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 8.10.1 General See Note 8.10A 8.10.2 Complete isolator (single-package type) See Note 8.2.9A -|| ||| || || 8.10.3 Application: Incandescent lamp and symmetrical photoconductive transducer | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.10.4 Application: Photoemissive diode and phototransistor 8.11 Solid-State Thyratron (replacement type) See symbol 7.3.9 NOTE — 8.11A: If the thyratron replacement has only one cathode lead, see symbol 8.6.13.1, Style 3. 8.11.1 Balanced 8.11.2 Unbalanced 131 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Cross References Bridge-Type Rectifier (item 16.3.3) NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 9. Graphic Symbols for Circuit Protectors 9.1 Fuse (one-time thermal current-overload device) 9.1.1 General 9.1.1.1 Fuse, supply side indicated by a thick line 9.1.2 Fuse with alarm contact NOTE — 9.1.2A: When fuse blows, alarm bus A is connected to power supply bus S. The letters S (supply), L (load), and A (alarm circuit) are for explanation only, and are not part of the symbol. 132 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.1.3 Isolating fuse-switch; high-voltage primary fuse cutout, dry 9.1.4 High-voltage primary fuse cutout, oil 9.1.5 Isolating fuse-switch for on-load switching 9.1.6 Temperature-sensitive fuse (ambient-temperature operated) USE SYMBOL 2.12.3 9.2 Current Limiter (for power cable) The arrowheads in this case are filled. NOTE — 9.2A: Use appropriate number of single-line diagram symbols. Avoid conflict with symbol 1.7.3 if used on the same diagram. 133 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 9.3 Lightning Arrester F Arrester (electric surge, etc) Gap See also symbol 8.5.6 | | |||| | | F -- The sides of the rectangle shall be approximately in the ratio of 1 to 2 and the space between rectangles shall be approximately equal to the width of a rectangle. || ||| || || 9.3.2 Carbon block; telephone protector block |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.3.1 General 9.3.3 Electrolytic or aluminum cell This symbol is not composed of arrowheads. 9.3.4 Horn gap 9.3.5 Protective gap These triangles shall not be filled. 9.3.6 Sphere gap 9.3.7 Valve or film element 134 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 9.3.8 Multigap, general 9.3.9 Application: gap plus valve plus ground, 2-pole 9.4 Circuit Breaker F If it is desired to show the condition causing the breaker to trip, the relay protective-function symbols in item 9.5.1 may be used alongside the breaker symbol. -- || ||| || || 9.4.2 Air circuit breaker, if distinction is needed; for alternating-current circuit breakers rated at 1,500 volts or less and for all direct-current circuit breakers | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.4.1 General 9.4.3 Network protector 9.4.4 Circuit breaker, other than covered by symbol 9.4.1 The symbol in the right column is for a 3-pole breaker. NOTE — 9.4.4A: On a power diagram, the symbol may be used without other identification. On a composite drawing where confusion with the general circuit element symbol (item 16.1) may result, add the identifying letters CB inside or adjacent to the square. 135 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 9.4.5 Application: 3-pole circuit breaker with thermal-overload device in all 3 poles 9.4.6 Application: 3-pole circuit breaker with magnetic-overload device in all 3 poles Fundamental symbols for contacts, coils, mechanical connections, etc, are the basis of relay symbols and should be used to represent relays on complete diagrams. See RELAY COIL; OPERATING COIL (item 4.5) and RELAY (item 4.30) 136 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- 9.5 Protective Relay || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.4.7 Application: 3-pole circuit breaker, drawout type ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 9.5.1 Relay protective functions The following symbols may be used to indicate protective functions, or device-function numbers may be placed in the circle or adjacent to the basic symbol (see American National Standard for Manual and Automatic Station Control, Supervisory, and Associated Telemetering Equipments, C37.2-1970). NOTE — 9.5.1A: An operating-quantity symbol must be added to the general symbols 9.5.2 through 9.5.6 in accordance with the rules of 9.5.9. 9.5.2 Over, general 9.5.3 Under, general 9.5.4 Direction, general; directional over 9.5.5 Balance, general 9.5.6 Differential, general 9.5.7 Pilot wire, general 9.5.8 Carrier current, general 9.5.9 Operating quantity The operating quantity is indicated by the following letters or symbols placed either on or immediately above the relay protective-function symbols shown above. C 13 Current13 The use of the letter may be omitted in the case of current, and the absence of such letter presupposes that the relay operates on current. 137 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 Z F GP φ W S T V GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Distance Frequency Gas pressure Phase Power Synchronism Temperature Voltage 9.5.10 Ground relays Relays operative on residual current only are so designated by attaching the ground symbol to the relay protective-function symbol. Note that the zero phase-sequence designation given below may be used instead when desirable. 9.5.11 Phase-sequence quantities Operations on phase-sequence quantities may be indicated by the use of the conventional subscripts 0, 1, and 2 after the letter indicating the operating quantity. 9.5.12 Applications -|| ||| || || 9.5.12.1 Overcurrent | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.5.12.2 Directional overcurrent 9.5.12.3 Directional residual overcurrent 9.5.12.4 Undervoltage 9.5.12.5 Power directional 138 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 9.5.12.6 Balanced current 9.5.12.7 Differential current 9.5.12.8 Distance 9.5.12.9 Directional distance 9.5.12.10 Overfrequency 9.5.12.11 Overtemperature 9.5.12.12 Phase balance 9.5.12.13 Phase sequence -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 9.5.12.14 Pilot wire, differential-current |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 139 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 9.5.12.15 Pilot wire, directional-comparison 9.5.12.16 Carrier pilot 9.5.12.17 Positive phase-sequence undervoltage 9.5.12.18 Negative phase-sequence overcurrent 9.5.12.19 Gas-pressure (Buchholz) 9.5.12.20 Out-of-step Cross References NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 10. Graphic Symbols for Acoustic Devices 10.1 Audible-Signaling Device 10.1.1 Bell, electrical F ; telephone ringer F NOTE — 10.1.1A: If specific identification is required, the abbreviation AC (or symbol 1.8.2) or DC (or lower symbol 1.8.1) may be added within or adjacent to the symbol. 140 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 10.1.1.1 Single-stroke 10.1.2 Buzzer F 10.1.3 Loudspeaker F IEC Horn, Electrical F Siren F Underwater Sound Transducer (with acoustic output) Sound Reproducer If specific identification of loudspeaker types is required, the following letter combinations may be added in the symbol at the locations indicated by the * and the ‡: * HN * HW * LS * SN ‡ EM ‡ EMN ‡ MG ‡ PM Horn, electrical F Howler Loudspeaker F Siren F Electromagnetic with moving coil (moving-coil leads should be identified) Electromagnetic with moving coil and neutralizing winding (moving-coil leads should be identified) Magnetic armature Permanent magnet with moving coil 141 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- 10.1.3.2 Application: specific types || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 10.1.3.1 General GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- IEEE Std 315-1975 -- || ||| || || 10.1.3.3 Loudspeaker-microphone; underwater sound transducer, two-way 10.1.4 Telegraph sounder F 10.2 Microphone F Telephone Transmitter 10.2.1 General 10.3 Handset Operator’s Set 10.3.1 General 142 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 10.3.2 With push-to-talk switch 10.3.3 3-conductor handset 10.3.4 4-conductor handset 10.3.5 4-conductor handset with push-to-talk switch 10.3.6 Operator’s set 10.4 Telephone Receiver Earphone F Hearing-Aid Receiver |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 10.4.1 General -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 10.4.2 Headset, double 143 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 10.4.3 Headset, single Cross References NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 11. Graphic Symbols for Lamps and Visual-Signaling Devices 11.1 Lamp See also item 8.5.4.2 11.1.1 Lamp, general; high source, general See also item 11.2.7 NOTES: 11.1.1B — If it is essential to indicate the following characteristics, the specified letter or letters may be inserted within or placed adjacent to the symbol. 144 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | A Amber B Blue C Clear G Green O Orange OP Opalescent P Purple R Red W White Y Yellow ARC Arc EL Electroluminescent FL Fluorescent HG Mercury vapor |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 11.1.1A — This symbol may be used to represent one or more lamps with or without operating auxiliaries. Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IN IR NA NE UV XE LED IEEE Std 315-1975 Incandescent Infrared Sodium vapor Neon Ultraviolet Xenon Light-emitting diode 11.1.1C — For polarity-sensitive devices, identify the appropriate lead with the (+) polarity mark. 11.1.2 Fluorescent lamp F 11.1.2.1 2-terminal 11.1.2.2 4-terminal 11.1.3 Glow lamp F , cold-cathode lamp; neon lamp 11.1.3.1 Alternating-current type 11.1.3.2 Direct-current type See also ELECTRON TUBE (symbol 7.3.4.1) 11.1.4 Incandescent lamp F (incandescent-filament illuminating lamp) The primary characteristic of the element within the circle is designed to vary non-linearly with the temperature of the element. COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- 145 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved || ||| || || | | |||| | | See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 11.1.5 Ballast lamp; ballast tube IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 11.1.6 Electronic flash tube (lamp) 11.2 Visual-Signaling Device 11.2.1 Annunciator F (general) 11.2.2 Annunciator drop or signal, shutter or grid type -|| ||| || || 11.2.3 Annunciator drop or signal, ball type | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 11.2.4 Manually restored drop 11.2.5 Electrically restored drop 146 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 11.2.6 Communication switchboard-type lamp; indicating lamp F NOTE — 11.2.7A: The asterisk is not part of the circular symbol. Always add the letter or letters for colors specified in Note 11.1.1B within or adjacent to the circle. To avoid confusion with meter or basic relay symbols, add suffix L or IL to the letter or letters, for example, RL or RIL placed within or adjacent to the circle. -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | If confusion with other circular symbols may occur, the D-shaped symbol should be used. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 11.2.7 Indicating, pilot, signaling, or switchboard light; indicator light ; signal light Avoid conflict with symbols 4.5, 12.1.1, and 13.1.2 if used on the same diagram. 11.2.7.1 Application: green signal light 11.2.8 Jeweled signal light Cross References NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 147 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 12. Graphic Symbols for Readout Devices 12.1 Meter Instrument NOTE — 12.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always replace the asterisk by one of the following letter combinations, depending on the function of the meter or instrument, unless some other identification is provided in the circle and explained on the diagram. A AH C CMA CMC CMV CRO DB DBM DM DTR F GD I INT µA or UA MA NM OHM OP OSCG PF PH PI RD REC RF SY t° THC TLM TT V VA Ammeter F IEC Ampere-hour meter Coulombmeter Contact-making (or breaking) ammeter Contact-making (or breaking) clock Contact-making (or breaking) voltmeter Oscilloscope F Cathode-ray oscillograph DB (decibel) meter Audio level/meter F DBM (decibels referred to 1 milliwatt) meter Demand meter Demand-totalizing relay Frequency meter F Ground detector Indicating meter Integrating meter Microammeter Milliammeter Noise meter Ohmmeter F Oil pressure meter Oscillograph, string Power factor meter Phasemeter F Position indicator Recording demand meter Recording meter Reactive factor meter Synchroscope Temperature meter Thermal converter Telemeter Total time meter Elapsed time meter Voltmeter F IEC Volt-ammeter 148 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS VAR VARH VI VU W WH IEEE Std 315-1975 Varmeter F Varhour meter Volume indicator Audio-level meter F Standard volume indicator Audio-level meter F Wattmeter F IEC Watthour meter 12.1.1 Galvanometer F Avoid conflict with symbols 4.5 and 13.1.2 if used on the same diagram. 12.2 Electromagnetically Operated Counter Message Register 12.2.1 General 12.2.2 With make contact Cross References NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 149 IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 13. Graphic Symbols for Rotating Machinery 13.1 Rotating Machine F (general) || ||| || || | | |||| | | 13.1.2 Generator |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 13.1.1 Basic -- Avoid conflict with symbols 12.1.1 and 21.5.1 if used on the same diagram. 13.1.2.1 Generator, direct-current 13.1.2.2 Generator, alternating-current 13.1.2.3 Generator, synchronous 13.1.3 Motor F (general) 150 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 13.1.3.1 Motor, direct-current 13.1.3.2 Motor, alternating-current 13.1.3.3 Motor, synchronous 13.1.4 Motor, multispeed USE SYMBOLS 13.1.3 AND NOTE SPEEDS 13.1.5 14 Rotating armature with commutator and brushes |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 13.1.6 Hand generator 13.2 Field, Generator or Motor | | |||| | | Either symbol of item 6.2.1 may be used in the following items. -- || ||| || || 13.2.1 Compensating or commutating 13.2.2 Series 14 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 151 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 13.2.3 Shunt, or separately excited 13.2.4 Permanent magnet USE SYMBOL 2.8 13.3 Winding Connection Symbols Motor and generator winding connection symbols may be shown in the basic circle using the following representations. 13.3.1 1-phase 13.3.2 2-phase 13.3.3 3-phase wye (ungrounded) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 13.3.4 3-phase wye (ungrounded) || ||| || || | | |||| | | 13.3.5 3-phase delta -- 13.3.6 6-phase diametrical 152 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 13.3.7 6-phase double-delta 13.4 Applications: Direct-Current Machines 13.4.1 15 Separately excited direct-current generator or motor 13.4.2 15 Separately excited direct-current generator or motor; with commutating or compensating field winding, or both 13.4.3 15 Compositely excited direct-current generator or motor; with commutating or compensating field winding, or both -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 13.4.4 15 Direct-current series motor or 2-wire generator |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 153 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 13.4.5 16 Direct-current series motor or 2-wire generator; with commutating or compensating field winding, or both 13.4.6 16 Direct-current shunt motor or 2-wire generator 13.4.7 16 Direct-current shunt motor or 2-wire generator; with commutating or compensating field winding, or both 13.4.8 16 Direct-current permanent-magnet-field generator or motor 13.4.9 16 16 Direct-current compound motor or 2-wire generator or stabilized shunt motor The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 154 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 13.4.10 17 Direct-current compound motor or 2-wire generator or stabilized shunt motor; with commutating or compensating field winding, or both 13.4.11 17 Direct-current 3-wire shunt generator 13.4.12 17 Direct-current 3-wire shunt generator; with commutating or compensating field winding, or both 13.4.13 17 Direct-current 3-wire compound generator 13.4.14 17 Direct-current 3-wire compound generator; with commutating or compensating field winding, or both 17 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 155 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 13.4.15 18 Direct-current balancer, shunt wound 13.4.16 18 Direct-current balancer, compound wound |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 13.4.17 18 Dynamotor || ||| || || | | |||| | | 13.4.18 18 Double-current generator -- 13.4.19 18 Acyclic generator, separately excited 18 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 156 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 13.4.20 19 Regulating generator (rotary amplifier), shunt wound with short-circuited brushes 13.4.21 19 Regulating generator (rotary amplifier), shunt wound without short-circuited brushes 13.4.22 19 Regulating generator (rotary amplifier), shunt wound with compensating field winding and short-circuited brushes 13.4.23 19 Regulating generator (rotary amplifier), shunt woud with compensating field winding, without shortcircuited brushes 13.4.24 DC-to-dc rotary converter with common permanent magnetic field 13.4.25 DC-to-dc rotary converter with common field winding 19 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 157 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 13.5 Applications: Alternating-Current Machines 13.5.1 20 Squirrel-cage induction motor or generator, split-phase induction motor or generator, rotary phase converter, or repulsion motor 13.5.2 20 Wound-rotor induction motor, synchronous induction motor, induction generator, or induction frequency converter 13.5.3 20 Alternating-current series motor 13.5.4 20 Alternating-current series motor, with commutating or compensating field winding, or both 13.5.5 20 1-phase shaded-pole motor 13.5.6 20 1-phase repulsion-start induction motor 20 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 158 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 13.5.7 21 1-phase hysteresis motor 13.5.8 21 Reluctance motor 13.5.9 21 1-phase subsynchronous reluctance motor -- 13.5.10 21 Magnetoelectric generator, 1-phase; telephone magneto || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 13.5.11 21 Shunt-characteristic brush-shifting motor 13.5.12 21 Series-characteristic brush-shifting motor with 3-phase rotor 13.5.13 Series-characteristic brush-shifting motor with 6- or 8-phase rotor 21 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 159 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 13.5.14 Ohmic-drop exciter with 3- or 6-phase input -|| ||| || || 13.5.15 Ohmic-drop exciter with 3- or 6-phase input, with output leads | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 13.5.16 3-phase regulating machine 13.5.17 Phase shifter with 1-phase output See PHASE SHIFTER (item 16.6) and TRANSFORMER (item 6.4) 13.5.18 Phase shifter with 3-phase output See PHASE SHIFTER (item 16.6) and TRANSFORMER (item 6.4) 160 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 13.6 Applications: Alternating-Current Machines with Direct-Current Field Excitation 13.6.1 22 Synchronous motor, generator, or condenser 13.6.2 22 13.6.3 22 Synchronous Synchronous motor, generator, or condenser with neutral brought out motor, generator, or condenser with both ends of each phase brought out 13.6.4 22 Double-winding synchronous generator, motor, or condenser -- 13.6.5 22 Synchronous-synchronous frequency changer || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 22 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 161 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 13.6.6 23 Synchronous-induction frequency changer 13.7 Applications: Alternating- and Direct-Current Composite 13.7.1 23 Synchronous or regulating-pole converter 13.7.2 23 Synchronous booster or regulating-pole converter; with commutating or compensating field windings, or both 13.7.3 23 Synchronous converter, shunt-wound with commutating or compensating field windings, or both 23 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 162 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 13.7.4 24 Synchronous converter, compound-wound with commutating or compensating field windings, or both 13.7.5 24 Motor converter 13.8 Synchro F If identification is required, a letter combination from the following list shall be placed adjacent to the symbol to indicate the type of synchro. CDX CT CX TDR TDX TR TX RS Control-differential transmitter Control transformer Control transmitter Torque-differential receiver Torque-differential transmitter Torque receiver Torque transmitter Resolver If the outer winding is rotatable in bearings, the suffix B shall be added to the above letter combinations. 13.8.1 General Complete symbols may also be formed by using the winding symbol 6.2.1. 24 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 163 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 13.8.2 Synchro, control transformer; synchro, receiver F synchro, transmitter 13.8.3 Synchro, differential receiver; synchro, differential transmitter 13.8.4 Synchro, resolver F F F Type shown: 2-phase rotor and 2-phase stator Cross References 14. Graphic Symbols for Mechanical Functions 14.1 Mechanical Connection Mechanical Interlock The preferred location of the mechanical connection is as shown in the various applications, but other locations may be equally acceptable. 14.1.1 Mechanical connection The top symbol consists of short dashes. NOTE — 14.1.1A: The short parallel lines should be used only where there is insufficient space for the short dashes in series. See symbol 4.9.3 for application. 164 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 14.1.2 Mechanical connection or interlock with fulcrum These are short dashes. 14.1.3 Mechanical interlock, other INDICATE BY A NOTE 14.2 Mechanical Motion 14.2.1 Translation, one direction -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 14.2.2 Translation, both directions |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 14.2.3 Rotation, one direction 14.2.3.1 Application: angular motion, applied to open contact (make), symbol 4.3.2 NOTE — 14.2.3.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Explanatory information (similar to type shown) may be added if necessary to explain circuit operation. 14.2.4 Rotation, both directions 14.2.4.1 Alternating or reciprocating For application see symbol 2.3.7.7 165 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 14.2.5 Rotation designation (applied to a resistor) CW indicates position of adjustable contact at the limit of clockwise travel viewed from knob or actuator end unless otherwise indicated. NOTE — 14.2.5A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always add identification within or adjacent to the rectangle. 14.2.6 Rotational speed or angular velocity dependence, shown with rotational arrow See symbol 4.24.4 for application -|| ||| || || 14.3 Clutch Brake 14.3.1 Clutch disengaged when operating means (not shown) is deenergized or nonoperated | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 14.3.2 Clutch engaged when operating means (not shown) is deenergized or nonoperated 166 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 14.3.3 Brake applied when operating means (not shown) is energized 14.3.4 Brake released when operating means (not shown) is energized -- 14.4 Manual Control || ||| || || 14.4.1 General | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 14.4.2 Operated by pushing 14.4.3 Operated by pushing and pulling (push-pull) Cross References NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 167 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15. Graphic Symbols Commonly Used in Connection with VHF, UHF, SHF Circuits 15.1 Discontinuity (Introducing intentional wave reflection) A component that exhibits throughout the frequency range of interest the properties of the type of circuit element indicated by the symbol within the triangle. Commonly used for coaxial and waveguide transmission. 15.1.1 25 General 15.1.1.1 Terminal discontinuity (one-port) 15.1.1.2 Discontinuity (two-port) 15.1.2 Equivalent series element, general, in series with guided transmission path 15.1.2.1 Capacitive reactance 25 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 168 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 15.1.2.2 Inductive reactance |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.1.2.3 Resistance || ||| || || | | |||| | | 15.1.2.4 Inductance-capacitance circuit with zero reactance at resonance -- 15.1.2.5 Inductance-capacitance circuit with infinite reactance at resonance 15.1.3 Equivalent shunt element, general, in parallel with guided transmission path 15.1.3.1 Capacitive susceptance 15.1.3.2 Inductive susceptance 169 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.1.3.3 Conductance 15.1.3.4 Inductance-capacitance circuit having zero reactance, infinite susceptance at resonance 15.1.3.5 Inductance-capacitance circuit having infinite reactance, zero susceptance at resonance 15.1.4 Slide-screw tuner 15.1.5 E-H tuner 15.1.6 Multistub tuner with 3 stubs 15.2 Coupling Commonly used in coaxial and waveguide diagrams. 170 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 15.2.1 Coupling by aperture with an opening of less than full waveguide size Transmission loss may be indicated. NOTE — 15.2.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always replace the asterisk by E, H, or HE, depending on the type of coupling. E H HE indicates that the physical plane of the aperture is perpendicular to the transverse component of the major E lines. indicates that the physical plane of the aperture is parallel to the transverse component of the major E lines. indicates coupling by all other kinds of apertures. 15.2.1.1 Application: E-plane coupling by aperture to space 15.2.1.2 Application: E-plane coupling by aperture; 2 ends of transmission path available 15.2.1.3 Application: E-plane coupling by aperture; 3 ends of transmission path available 15.2.1.4 Application: E-plane coupling by aperture; 4 ends of transmission path available 15.2.2 Coupling by loop to space 15.2.3 Coupling by loop to guided transmission path 171 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.2.4 Coupling by loop from coaxial to circular waveguide with direct-current grounds connected 15.2.5 Coupling by probe to space See OPEN CIRCUIT (item 3.8.1) 15.2.6 Coupling by probe to guided transmission path 15.2.7 Coupling by probe from coaxial to rectangular waveguide with direct-current grounds connected 15.3 Directional Coupler F Commonly used in coaxial and waveguide diagrams. The arrows indicate the directions of power flow. Number of coupling paths, type of coupling, and transmission loss may be indicated. 15.3.1 General 15.3.2 Application: E-plane aperture coupling, 30-decibel transmission loss 172 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 15.3.3 Application: loop coupling, 30-decibel transmission loss 15.3.4 Application: probe coupling, 30-decibel transmission loss 15.3.5 Application: resistance coupling, 30-decibel transmission loss 15.3.6 Application: directional coupler showing coupling loss and directivity First value is coupling loss; second value is directivity. 15.4 Hybrid Directionally Selective Transmission Devices 15.4.1 Hybrid (general) 15.4.2 Hybrid, junction (magic T) Commonly used in coaxial and waveguide transmission Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 173 IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.4.3 Application: rectangular waveguide and coaxial coupling 15.4.4 Hybrid, circular (basic) NOTE — 15.4.4A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always replace the asterisk by E, H, or HE. E indicates there is a principal E transverse field in the plane of the ring. H indicates that there is a principal H transverse field in the plane of the ring. HE shall be used for all other cases. An arm that has coupling of a different type from that designated above shall be marked according to COUPLING (item 15.2.1). Critical distances should be labeled in terms of guide wavelengths. 15.4.4.1 Application: 4-arm circular hybrid -- 15.4.4.2 Application: rectangular waveguide circular hybrid with 3 arms coupling in the E plane and a fourth arm coupling in the H plane || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.5 Mode Transducer Commonly used in coaxial and waveguide diagrams. If it is desired to specify the type of transmission, appropriate indications may be added. 174 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 15.5.1 General 15.5.2 Application: transition from rectangular to circular waveguide 15.5.3 Application: transition from rectangular waveguide to coaxial cable with mode suppression and direct-current grounds connected 15.6 Mode Suppressor Commonly used in coaxial and waveguide transmission. 15.6.1 General 15.7 Rotary Joint (radio-frequency rotary coupler F ) 15.7.1 General: with rectangular waveguide system NOTE — 15.7.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. If necessary, a transmission path recognition symbol may be added. See symbol 3.6. 15.7.1.1 Application: coaxial type in rectangular waveguide system 175 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.7.1.2 Application: circular waveguide type in rectangular waveguide system 15.8 Nonreciprocal Devices 15.8.1 Isolator See also symbol 8.10 15.8.2 Nonreciprocal directional phase shifter -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 15.8.3 Gyrator |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- The longer arrow indicates the direction of propagation in which the required phase change occurs. 15.8.4 Circulator, fixed direction Arrowhead indicates direction of power flow from any input to next adjacent arm but not to any other arm. Circulator may have three or more ports. 15.8.4.1 Reversible direction Current entering the coil at the end marked with the dot causes the energy in the circulator to flow in the direction of the arrowhead marked with the dot. 176 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 15.8.5 Field-polarization rotator Arrow indicates direction of rotation of electric field when viewed in direction of signal flow. 15.8.6 Field-polarization amplitude modulator 15.9 Resonator Tuned Cavity F -|| ||| || || Excluding piezoelectric and magnetostriction devices. | | |||| | | 15.9.1 General Commonly used for coaxial and waveguide transmission. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.9.2 Application: resonator with mode suppression coupled by an E-plane aperture to a guided transmission path and by a loop to a coaxial path 15.9.3 Application: tunable resonator having adjustable Q coupled by a probe to a coaxial system 177 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.9.4 Application: tunable resonator with direct-current ground connected to an electron device and adjustably coupled by an E-plane aperture to a rectangular waveguide 15.10 Resonator (cavity-type) Tube 15.10.1 Single-cavity envelope and grid-type associated electrodes -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.10.2 Double-cavity envelope and grid-type associated electrodes 15.10.3 Multicavity magnetron anode and envelope 15.11 Magnetron 15.11.1 Resonant type with coaxial output 178 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 15.11.2 Transit-time split-plate type with stabilizing deflecting electrodes and internal circuit 15.11.3 Tunable, aperture coupled -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 15.12 Velocity-Modulation (velocity-variation) Tube |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.12.1 Reflex klystron, integral cavity, aperture coupled 15.12.2 Double-cavity klystron, integral cavity, permanent externally ganged tuning, loop coupled (coupling loop may be shown inside if desired). See symbol 15.2.2 15.13 Transmit-Receive (TR) Tube Gas-filled, tunable integral cavity, aperture coupled, with starter. 179 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.14 Traveling-Wave-Tube 15.14.1 Forward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with four grids, having slow-wave structure with attenuation, magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf input and rf output coupling, each by E-plane aperture to external rectangular waveguide. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.14.2 Forward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with four grids, having slow-wave structure with attenuation, magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf input and rf output coupling, each by inductive coupling 15.14.3 Forward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with four grids, having slow-wave structure with attenuation, external electromagnetic focusing, rf input and rf output coupling, even by external cavity and loop coupling to a coaxial path 180 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 15.14.5 Forward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with four grids, having bifilar slow-wave structure with attenuation, electrostatic focusing, rf input and rf output coupling, each by inductive coupling |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.14.4 Forward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with four grids, having slow-wave structure with attenuation, magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf input and rf output coupling, each by direct connection from slow-wave structure to a coaxial path 15.14.6 Backward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with two grids, having slow-wave structure with attenuation, sole (beam-aligning electrode), magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf input and rf output coupling, each by E-plane aperture to external rectangular waveguide 15.14.7 Backward-wave traveling-wave-tube oscillator shown with two grids, having slow-wave structure with attenuation, sole (beam-aligning electrode), magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf output coupling by inductive coupling 181 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.14.8 Backward-wave traveling-wave-tube oscillator shown with two grids, having slow-wave structure with attenuation, sole (beam-aligning electrode), magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf output coupling by inductive coupling, with slow-wave structure connected internally to collector 15.15 Balun 15.15.1 General -|| ||| || || 15.15.2 26 Application: balun connected between a balanced dipole and unbalanced coaxial cable | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.16 Filter 15.16.1 Mode filter 15.16.2 Frequency filter (bandpass) See also symbol 16.1.1.2 15.17 Phase Shifter (matched) See also symbols 15.8.2 and 16.6 26 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 182 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 15.18 Ferrite Bead Ring See also symbol 6.1.4 NOTE — 15.18A: If equivalent circuits must be shown within the symbol, the size or the aspect ratio of the original symbol may be altered providing its distinctive shape is retained. 15.18.1 General 15.18.2 Application: with equivalent circuit (LC network) shown 15.19 Line Stretcher (with female connectors shown) Cross References -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Bifilar Slow-Wave Structure (item 2.6.4) Capacitive Termination (item 2.2.10) Coaxial Cable, Recognition Symbol (item 3.1.9) Inductive Termination (item 6.2.7) Intentional Isolation of DC Path in Coaxial or Waveguide Applications (item 3.5) Permanent Magnet (item 2.8) Resistive Termination (item 2.1.11) Shunt Capacitor (item 2.2.11) Shunt Inductor (item 6.2.6) Shunt Resistor (item 2.1.10) Strip-Type Transmission Line (item 3.7) Termination (item 3.8) Waveguide (item 3.6) 183 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Waveguide Flanges (item 5.7) NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 16. Graphic Symbols for Composite Assemblies NOTES: 16.1A — The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always indicate the type of apparatus by appropriate words or letters in the rectangle. 16.1B — If identification, electrical values, location data, and similar information must be noted within a symbol, the size or the aspect ratio of the original symbol may be altered providing its distinctive shape is retained. 16.1C — The use of a general circuit-element symbol is restricted to the following: a) Diagrams drawn in block form. b) A substitute for complex circuit elements when the internal operation of the circuit element is not important to the purpose of the diagram. c) Applications where a specific graphic symbol, or the parts to devise a suitable build-up, do not appear elsewhere in this standard. 16.1.1 General 16.1.1.1 Accepted abbreviations from ANSI Z32.13-1950 may be used in the rectangle. 16.1.1.2 The following letter combinations may be used in the rectangle: CLK EQ FAX FL FL-BE FL-BP FL-HP FL-LP IND PS RG Clock Equalizer Facsimile set F Filter Filter, band-elimination Filter, bandpass F Filter, high-pass F Filter, low-pass F Indicator Power supply F Recording unit 184 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 16.1 Circuit Assembly Circuit Subassembly Circuit Element ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS RU ST-INV DIAL TEL TPR TTY IEEE Std 315-1975 Reproducing unit Static inverter Telephone dial Telephone station Teleprinter F Teletypewriter F 16.2 Amplifier See also DIRECT-CURRENT MACHINES (symbols 13.4.20 to 13.4.23) 16.2.1 General The triangle is pointed in the direction of transmission. The symbol represents any method of amplification (electron tube, solid-state device, magnetic device, etc). NOTE — 16.2.1A: If identification, electrical values, location data, and similar information must be noted within a symbol, the size or aspect ratio of the original symbol may be altered providing its distinctive shape is retained. Amplifier use may be indicated in the triangle by words, standard abbreviations, or a letter combination from the following list: BDG BST CMP DC EXP LIM MON PGM PRE PWR TRQ Bridging Booster Compression Direct-current Expansion Limiting Monitoring Program Preliminary Power Torque 16.2.2 Magnetic amplifier 185 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 16.2.3 Application: amplifier with two inputs 16.2.4 Application: amplifier with two outputs 16.2.5 Application: amplifier with adjustable gain 16.2.6 Application: amplifier with associated attenuator 16.2.7 Application: amplifier with associated power supply -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 16.2.8 Application: amplifier with external feedback path |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 186 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 16.3 Rectifier See ELECTRON TUBE (item 7.1), SEMICONDUCTOR DIODE (symbol 8.5.1), and SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE (item 8.1) 16.3.1 General NOTES: 16.3.1A — Triangle points in direction of forward (easy) current as indicated by a direct-current ammeter, unless otherwise noted adjacent to the symbol. Electron flow is in the opposite direction. 16.3.1B — This symbol represents any method of rectification (electron tube, solid-state device, electrochemical device, etc). 16.3.2 Controlled |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 16.3.3 Bridge-type rectifier For connection or wiring diagram 16.4 Repeater (includes Telephone Repeater F ) 16.4.1 1-way repeater Triangle points in the direction of transmission. 187 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- 16.3.4 On connection or wiring diagrams, rectifier may be shown with terminals and polarity marking. Heavy line may be used to indicate nameplate or positive-polarity end. || ||| || || | | |||| | | See item 8.5.1 IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 16.4.2 2-wire, 2-way repeater 16.4.3 2-wire, 2-way repeater with low-frequency bypass 16.4.4 4-wire, 2-way repeater 16.5 Network Artificial Line (other than delay line) 16.5.1 General 16.5.2 Network, low-voltage power 16.6 Phase Shifter Phase-Changing Network For power circuits see ALTERNATING-CURRENT MACHINES (symbols 13.5.17 and 13.5.18) See also symbol 15.17 188 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 -- 16.6.1 General || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 16.6.2 3-wire or 3-phase 16.6.3 Application: adjustable 16.6.4 Differential phase shifter Phase shift φ in direction of arrowhead; magnitudes shall be indicated. 16.6.5 Application: adjustable 16.7 Chopper F NOTES: 16.7A — The explanatory words are not part of the symbol. 16.7B — When diagram is other than single line, show connections as required for a specific device. 189 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR -|| ||| || || 16.8 Diode-Type Ring Demodulator Diode-Type Ring Modulator | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 16.9 Gyro Gyroscope Gyrocompass 16.10 Position Indicator 16.10.1 DC synchro type 16.10.2 Inductor type 190 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 16.11 Position Transmitter 16.11.1 Desynn type (dc synchro type) 16.11.2 Inductor type 16.12 Fire Extinguisher Actuator Heads 16.12.1 Single head with connectors 16.12.2 Double head with connectors Cross References Oscillator (item 2.9) -- NOTES: || ||| || || 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). | | |||| | | 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 191 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 17. Graphic Symbols for Analog and Digital Logic Functions 17.1 Operational Amplifier 17.2 Summing Amplifier (4 inputs and 1 output shown) 17.3 Integrator (Amplifier) (4 inputs and 1 output shown) NOTES: 17.3A — The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always add identification within or adjacent to the circle. 17.3B — The letters IC mean Initial Conditions. 192 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 17.4 Electronic Multiplier 17.4.1 Two dependent multipliers 17.5 Electronic Divider -- 17.6 Electronic Function Generator || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 17.7 Generalized Integrator 17.8 Positional Servomechanism Avoid conflict with item 2.6 if used on the same diagram. NOTE — 17.8A: Dashed line indicates positioned in accordance with an input signal. 193 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 17.9 Function Potentiometer Cross References 18. Graphic Symbols for Digital Logic Functions 18.1 Digital Logic Functions (See cross references) Cross References The following standards do not constitute a part of this standard; they are listed for reference purposes only: American National Standard Graphic Symbols for Logic Diagrams (Two-State Devices), Y32.14-1973 (IEEE Std 911973) NEMA Standard, Industrial Controls and Systems ICS-1970 with Revision 5, July 1975 NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 19. Graphic Symbols for Special-Purpose Maintenance Diagrams -|| ||| || || 19.0 Introduction | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- The graphic symbols shown in this section were developed primarily for use on special-purpose maintenance diagrams, such as symbolic integrated maintenance-type diagrams, to provide detailed maintenance and operating information. See also item 23.1(3) for reference document. Use on other types of diagrams, however, is recommended if necessary to emphasize particular functions as defined in this section.27 See paragraph A4.5 of the Introduction 27 The symbols shown in this section have comparable meanings or applications when used for drawings in mechanical, medical, or other disciplines or fields. 194 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 19.1 Data-Flow Code Signals NOTE — 19.1A: Use only if essential to provide detailed maintenance and operation information (such as symbolic integrated maintenance manual diagrams). 19.1.1 Functional flow path NOTE — 19.1.1A: Emphasis is required when it is necessary to differentiate between two relatively significant functional flow paths. 19.1.1.1 Major (most significant) 19.1.1.2 Minor (least significant) 19.1.2 Signal code NOTE — 19.1.2A: All signal-code symbols shall be drawn on the functional flow path lines, e.g., 19.1.2.1 Normal NOTE — 19.1.2.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Add an identification code letter when necessary for clarity. 19.1.2.1.1 Application: emergency mode 19.1.2.1.2 Application: automatic mode 19.1.2.2 Secondary flow; power distribution Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 195 IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 19.1.2.3 Reference signal voltage; reference frequency 19.1.2.4 Signal to energize relay 19.1.2.5 Transmitter pulse; pulse-forming network, discharge path, or subsequent high-level modulation pulse NOTE — 19.1.2.5A: This symbol shall be used only on a major (most significant) functional flow path. 19.1.2.6 Gating; synchronizing signal; low-level modulating signal NOTE — 19.1.2.6A: This symbol shall be used only on a minor (least significant) functional flow path. 19.1.2.7 Test signal; signal used to light a lamp or provide a meter reading 19.1.2.8 Feedback NOTE — 19.1.2.8A: The arrowheads shall be placed close together. 19.1.3 Fault-signal code NOTE — 19.1.3A: All fault signals shall use the signal-code symbols shown in items 19.1.2 through 19.1.2.6, except that they are not to be filled in. 19.1.3.1 Application: fault-isolation signal to relay 196 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 19.2 Functional Circuits See Note 19.1A 19.2.1 Amplifier circuit (such as voltage amplifier, power amplifier etc.) NOTES: 19.2.1A — This symbol represents an active circuit (of one or more stages) which changes the voltage or power level of the incoming signal, and contains one or more non-linear active elements, such as an electron tube, transistor, or diode. 19.2.1B — The asterisk is not part of the symbol. A circuit identifier code should be added for proper identification of the basic symbol. 19.2.2 Signal generator; signal processor NOTE — 19.2.2A: This symbol represents an active circuit (of one or more stages) which generates a signal or processes an incoming signal in a manner other than to change the signal voltage or power level, e.g., oscillator, multivibrator, mixer, etc. Such circuits contain one or more active elements, such as an electron tube, transistor, or diode. 19.2.3 Linear element; linear network NOTE — 19.2.3A: This symbol represents a resistor, a capacitor, or a network consisting of any combination of these linear elements, such as a filter network, voltage divider, pulse-forming network, etc. 19.2.4 Relay contacts 197 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 19.2.5 Relay coil or operating coil 19.2.6 Switch 19.2.7 Digital logic elements See Section 18 19.2.8 Composite circuit (other than those covered by symbols 19.2.1 through 19.2.6) -|| ||| || || Cross References | | |||| | | NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 20. Graphic Symbols Commonly Used on System Diagrams, Maps, and Charts 20.1 Radio Station Other antenna symbols may be used to indicate specific types. NOTE — 20.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol; identification of the type of station may be added within or adjacent to the symbol. 198 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 20.1.1 General 20.1.2 Portable 20.1.3 Mobile -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 20.1.4 Direction-finding 20.1.5 Radio beacon 199 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 20.1.6 Controlling 20.1.7 Passive relay 20.2 Space Station 20.2.1 General 20.2.2 Active space station 20.2.3 Passive space station 200 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 20.2.4 Earth station used for tracking a space station (shown with a paraboloidal antenna) 20.2.5 Application: earth station of a communication service via space station 20.3 Exchange Equipment 20.3.1 General NOTE — 20.3.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Replace the asterisk with information to specify a particular application. 20.3.2 Automatic switching 20.3.3 Manual switchboard 20.4 Telegraph Repeater The letter “T” may be omitted if no confusion will result. Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | 201 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 20.4.1 One-way simplex operation 20.4.2 Two-way simplex operation 20.4.3 Duplex operation -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 20.4.4 Qualifying symbols The following symbols are restricted to use with the symbols in item 20.4 of this standard. 20.4.4.1 Polar direct-current (double current) 20.4.4.2 Neutral direct-current (single current) 20.4.4.3 Alternating-current 20.4.5 Applications: 20.4.5.1 Polar direct-current for duplex operation 202 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 20.4.5.2 Polar direct-current/neutral direct-current for one-way simplex operation 20.4.5.3 Polar direct-current/alternating-current for one-way simplex operation 20.4.5.4 Regenerative type for one-way simplex operation 20.5 Telegraph Equipment 20.5.1 General NOTE — 20.5.1A: The letter “T” may be replaced by a suitable qualifying symbol from item 20.5.6. 20.5.2 Transmitter -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 20.5.3 Receiver 203 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 20.5.4 Two-way simplex 20.5.5 Duplex 20.5.6 Qualifying symbols The following symbols are restricted to use with the symbols in Section 20.5 of this standard. 20.5.6.1 Tape printing 20.5.6.2 Tape perforating; perforated tape 20.5.6.3 Simultaneous printing on and perforating of one tape 20.5.6.4 Page printing 20.5.6.5 Keyboard 20.5.6.6 Facsimile 204 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 20.5.7 Applications: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 20.5.7.1 Tape-printing receiver || ||| || || | | |||| | | 20.5.7.2 Tape-printing receiver with keyboard transmitter -- 20.5.7.3 Printing reperforator 20.5.7.4 Page-printing receiver 20.5.7.5 Page-printing receiver with keyboard transmitter 20.5.7.6 Facsimile receiver 20.5.7.7 Keyboard perforator 205 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 20.5.7.8 Automatic transmitter using perforated tape -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 20.5.7.9 Separate reperforator and automatic transmitter with continuous tape feed 20.6 Telephone Set 20.6.1 General 20.6.2 Local-battery 20.6.3 Common-battery 20.6.4 Dial-type NOTE — 20.6.4A: The dots may be omitted if no confusion would result. 20.6.5 Pushbutton dialing 206 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 20.6.6 With two or more extension lines 20.6.7 With coin box 20.6.8 With ringing generator 20.6.9 Loudspeaker-type 20.6.10 Amplifier-type 20.6.11 Sound-powered 20.6.12 Key or pushbutton type with special facilities (other than dialing or multiline operation) 207 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Cross References NOTES: 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 21. Graphic Symbols Commonly Used on System Diagrams, Maps, and Charts 21.1 Generating Station NOTES: 21.1A — Symbols for “planned” applications appear on the left; symbols for “in service” applications appear on the right. 21.1B — The preferred symbol is the square, but if necessary, a rectangle may be used. 21.1C — Relative sizes of symbols are shown. Symbol size may be reduced for small-size diagrams. See also paragraph A4.5 of the Introduction. 21.1.1 General See note 21.1A 21.2 Hydroelectric Generating Station See Note 21.1A 21.2.1 General 21.2.2 Run of river 208 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 21.2.3 With storage |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 21.2.4 With pumped storage 21.3 Thermoelectric Generating Station See Note 21.1A -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 21.3.1 General 21.3.2 Coal or lignite fueled 21.3.3 Oil or gas fueled 21.3.4 Nuclear energy fueled 209 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR -|| ||| || || 21.3.5 Geothermic | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 21.4 Prime Mover (qualifying symbols) Use if essential to show the type of prime mover in a generating station. See Note 21.1A 21.4.1 Gas turbine 21.4.1.1 Application: shown for oil- or gas-fueled generating station 21.4.2 Reciprocating engine 21.4.2.1 Application: shown for oil- or gas-fueled generating station 21.5 Substation See Note 21.1A 21.5.1 General Avoid conflict with symbol 13.1.1 if used on the same diagram. 210 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 21.5.2 Rectifier substation |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Use if essential to show type of equipment. | | |||| | | Cross References 1 — See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2 — Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column. 3 — For centered figures with symbols appearing side by side, the symbol on the left-hand side should be considered to be for a single line (one-line) diagram and the symbol on the right-hand side for a complete diagram, i.e., 1.5.1. 22. Class Designation Letters 28 for use in assignment of reference designations for electrical and electronics parts and equipments as described in ANSI Y32.16-1975, Reference Designations for Electrical and Electronics Parts and Equipments 22.1 Class Designation Letter The letters identifying the class of an item shall be selected in accordance with the list in paragraph 22.4. For reference purposes, see also alphabetical listings of the items and other common and colloquial names in the index. Graphic symbols do not appear in this standard for H, HP, N, WT, and some MP (listed in paragraph 22.4) because they apply to items beyond the scope of this standard. Certain item names and designating letters may apply to either a part or an assembly. 22.2 Special Considerations for Class Designation Letter Assignment 22.2.1 Actual versus intended function If a part serves a purpose other than its generally intended one, the function actually performed shall be represented by the graphic symbol used on the schematic diagram; the class letter shall be chosen from the list in paragraph 22.4 and shall be indicative of its physical characteristics. For example, a semiconductor diode used as a fuse would be 28 Device function designations for power switchgear, industrial control, and industrial equipment use are not covered by this standard. For typical application of these device function designations, see: a) American national Standard Maual and Automatic Station Control, Supervisory, and Associated Telemetering Equipments, C37.2-1970. b) NEMA Standard, Industrial Controls and Systems ICS-1970 (R1975). c) Joint Industrial Council Electrical Standards for Mass Production Equipment, EMP-1-1967, and General Purpose Machine Tools, EGP-1-1967. d) Military Standard, Designations for Electric Power Switchgear Devices and Industrial Control Devices, MIL-STD-27. 211 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- || ||| || || NOTES: IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR represented by the graphic symbol for a fuse (actual function), but the class letter would be D or CR (class of part). If a part has a dual function, the class letter for the principal physical characteristic of the part shall apply. 22.2.2 Assembly versus subassembly The term subassembly as used herein shall apply equally to an assembly. 22.2.3 Subassembly versus individual part A group of parts shall not be treated as a subassembly unless it is one or more of the following: a) b) c) d) A plug-in item. A significant item covered by a separate schematic. A multiapplication item. Likely to be handled as a replaceable item for maintenance purposes. 22.2.4 Specific versus general The letters A and U (for assembly) shall not be used if more specific class letters are listed in paragraph 22.4 for a particular item. 22.2.5 Inseparable subassemblies Potted, embedded, riveted, or hermetically sealed subassemblies, modular assemblies, printed circuit boards, and integrated circuit packages and similar items which are ordinarily replaced as a single item of supply shall be treated as parts. They shall be assigned the class letter U, unless a more specific class letter is applicable. 22.3 Item Names In the alphabetically arranged class letter list of paragraph 22.4, item names approved in the Federal Item Identification Guide, Cataloging Handbook H6-1, as of the date of this edition (though additional modifiers may be necessary), are indicated by the symbol F . For definitions which are not contained in Handbook H6-1, see American National Standard C42.100. Parts not specifically included in this list shall be assigned a letter or letters from the list below for the part or class most similar in function. -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Designations for general classes of parts are marked with an asterisk (*) to facilitate designation of parts not specifically included in this standard. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 22.4 Class Designation Letters: Alphabetical List 212 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 A*† (see also U and 22.2.4) electronic divider electronic function generator (other than rotating) electronic multiplier facsimile set F field-polarization amplitude modulator field-polarization rotator general circuit element gyroscope integrator positional servomechanism sensor (transducer to electric power) separable assembly‡ separable subassembly telephone set telephone station teleprinter F teletypewriter F AR amplifier (other than rotating) repeater AT bolometer capacitive termination fixed attenuator F inductive termination isolator (nonreciprocal device) pad resistive termination B blower motor F synchro F -- barrier photocell battery F battery cell blocking layer cell photovoltaic transducer solar cell C capacitor bushing capacitor F CB circuit breaker F network protector CP connector adapter F coupling (aperture, loop, or probe) junction (coaxial or waveguide) || ||| || || BT | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 213 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR asymmetrical varistor crystal diode current regulator (semiconductor device) diode (semiconductor type) diode rectifier (semiconductor type) diode-type ring demodulator diode-type ring modulator metallic rectifier F photodiode (photosensitive type) stabistor thyristor (semiconductor diode type) varactor D or VR breakdown diode (voltage regulator) overvoltage absorber F DC directional coupler DL delay function delay line F slow-wave structure DS alphanumeric display device annunciator electrically restored drop general light source indicator (excluding meter or thermometer) F lamp (excluding heating lamp) light-emitting solid-state device manually restored drop photodiode (photoemissive type) signal light visual alarm visual indicator visual signaling device -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- D or CR 214 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 E* aluminum cell antenna armature binding post F cable termination carbon block circuit terminal conductivity cell electrical contact F electrical contact brush F electrical shield electrolytic cell ferrite bead rings film element gap (horn, protective, or sphere) Hall element ignitor gap insulator F lightning arrester F magnetic core miscellaneous electrical part optical shield permanent magnet F rotary joint (microwave) short circuit (termination) spark gap splice telephone protector F telephone protector block F terminal (individual) F valve element vibrating reed EQ equalizer equalizing network F current limiter (for power cable) fuse F fuse cutout FL filter G electronic chopper F generator F ignition magneto F interrupter vibrator F oscillator rotating amplifier (regulating generator) telephone magneto H* hardware (common fasteners, etc) HP* hydraulic part HR heater F heating lamp heating resistor infrared lamp F thermomechanical transducer HS handset F operator’s set | | |||| | | || ||| || || -- 215 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- F Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 216 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR HT earphone F electrical headset F receiver (excluding radio receiver) telephone receiver HY circulator directionally selective transmission device hybrid circuit network F hybrid coil (telephone usage) hybrid junction (magic T) J disconnecting device (receptacle connector) electrical receptacle connector F jack receptacle (connector, stationary portion) waveguide flange (choke) F K contactor (magnetically operated) relay F L coil (all not classified as transformers) F electrical solenoid F field winding generator field inductor lamp ballast motor field reactor F winding F LS audible alarm audible signaling device buzzer F electric bell F electric horn F loudspeaker F loudspeaker-microphone siren F telephone ringer F telephone sounder F underwater sound transducer M clock F coulomb accumulator elapsed time recorder electric timer electrical counter F electrochemical step-function device instrument message register meter meter-type level pressure gage oscillograph F oscilloscope F position indicator thermometer Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. MK hydrophone microphone F telephone transmitter MP* brake clutch mechanical interlock mechanical part miscellaneous mechanical part (bearing, coupling, gear, shaft) MT accelerometer measuring transducer mode transducer motional pickup transducer primary detector N** equipment subdivision P disconnecting device (plug connector) electrical plug connector F plug (connector, movable portion) waveguide flange (plain) F PS power supply F rectifier (complete power-supply assembly) PU head (with various modifiers) sound reproducer F Q semiconductor controlled rectifier semiconductor controlled switch phototransistor (3 terminal) thyratron (semiconductor device) thyratron (semiconductor triode type) transistor F R function potentiometer instrument shunt magnetoresistor potentiometer relay shunt resistor F rheostat F RE radio receiver RT ballast lamp ballast tube current-regulating resistor F resistance lamp temperature-sensing element thermal resistor F thermistor RV symmetrical varistor voltage-sensitive resistor F F 217 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc | | |||| | | converter (rotating machine) dynamotor F inverter (motor-generator) motor-generator F || ||| || || MG |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- IEEE Std 315-1975 -- ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR S contactor (manually, mechanically, or thermally operated) disconnecting device (switch) electrical safety interlock flasher (circuit interrupter) governor (electrical contact type) F speed regulator (electrical contact type) switch F telegraph key telephone dial F thermal cutout (circuit interrupter) (not visual) thermostat SQ electric squib F explosive squib fusible link igniter squib sensing link SR electrical contact ring rotating contact slip ring T autotransformer coaxial taper linear coupler telephone induction coil telephone repeating coil transformer F waveguide taper F F TB connecting strip terminal board F terminal strip test block TC semiconductor thermocouple thermocouple F thermopile TP†† test point TR radio transmitter U*† (see also A* and 22.2.4) inseparable assembly integrated-circuit package microcircuit micromodule photon-coupled isolator V electron tube F Geiger-Muller counter tube ionization chamber klystron magnetron phototube proportional counter tube resonator tube (cavity type) solion thyratron (electron tube) traveling-wave tube voltage regulator (electron tube) 218 F Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc F || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 VR (see also D) induction voltage regulator voltage regulator (excluding electron tube) F W bus bar F cable cable assembly (with connectors) coaxial cable conductor distribution line distribution path Goubau line strip-type transmission line transmission line transmission path waveguide F wire F WT‡‡ wiring tiepoint X fuseholder lampholder socket F Y magnetostriction oscillator piezoelectric crystal unit quartz crystal unit F tuning-fork resonator F Z artificial line (other than delay line) balun carrier-line trap coupled tunable resonator directional phase shifter (nonreciprocal) discontinuity (usually coaxial or waveguide transmission use) E-H tuner general network (where specific class letters do not fit) gyrator mode suppressor multistub tuner phase shifter phase-changing network F resonator (tuned cavity) slide-screw tuner F F *Device function designations for power switchgear, industrial control, and industrial equipment use are not covered by this standard. For typical application of these device function designations, see: American National Standard Manual and Automatic Station Control, Supervisory, and Associated Telemetering Equipments, C37.2-1970. NEMA Standard, Industrial Controls and Systems ICS-1970 (R1975). Joint Industrial Council Electrical Standards for Mass Production Equipment, EMP-1-1967, and General Purpose Machine Tools, EGP-1-1967. Military Standard, Designations for Electric Power Switchgear Devices and Industrial Control Devices, MIL-STD-27. †The class letter A is assigned on the basis that the item is separable. The class letter U shall be used if the item is inseparable. ‡For economic reasons, assemblies which are fundamentally separable may not be so provisioned but may be supplied as complete assemblies. However, the class letter A shall be retained. **Not a class letter, but used to identify a subdivision of an equipment in the Location Numbering Method. 219 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | ††Not a class letter, but commonly used to designate test points for maintenance purposes. See American National Standard Y14.15-1966 (R1973). ‡‡Not a class letter, but commonly used to designate a tiepoint on connection diagrams. See American National Standard Y14.15-1966 (R1973). |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 22.5 Item Names: Alphabetical List The index to this standard shows the class designation letter as applicable under the general rules, together with the item number of the representative graphic symbol. 22.6 Item Designations, IEC 113-2 For reference purposes, Appendix F shows a comparison of the class letters used to identify parts and equipment according to International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Publication 113-2 and those assigned in American National Standard Y32.2-1975. 23. Referenced Standards and Canadian Standard Z99 Modifications 23.1 Referenced Standards 29 When the following American National Standards are superseded by a revision approved by the American National Standards Institute, the revision shall apply: American National Standard Reference Designations for Electrical and Electronics Parts and Equipment, Y32.161975 (IEEE Std 200-1975 ) (1) American National Standard Graphic Symbols for Logic Diagrams, Y32.14-1973 (IEEE Std 91-1973 ) (1) American National Standard Drafting Practices (Electrical and Electronics Diagrams), Y14.15-1966 (R1973) and Supplements Y14.15a-1970 (R1973) and Y14.15b-1973. American National Standard Abbreviations for Use on Drawings, Y1.1-1972 (2) American National Standard Manual and Automatic Station Control, Supervisory, and Associated Telemetering Equipments, C37.2-1970 (2) American National Standard Dimensions of Caps, Plugs, and Receptacles, C73.10-1966 (R1972) through C73.441966 (R1972) American National Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms, C42.100-1972 (IEEE Std 100-1972) 29 For Military Applications: (1) Refer to the latest edition adopted for mandatory use by the Department of Defense. (2) Refer to the following military standards (latest edition at time of invitation to bid) in lieu of the American National Standards: ANSI C37.2-1970 (in part): use MIL-STD-27 Designations for Electric Power Switchgear Devices and Industrial Control Devices. ANSI Y1.1-1972: use MIL-STD-12 Abbreviations for Use on Drawings, Specifications, Standards, and in Technical Documents. (3) The following documents are listed for purposes of information only: MIL-STD-100 Engineering Drawing Practices. MIL-M-24100 Manuals, Technicals: Functionally Oriented Maintenance Manual (FOMM) Federal Cataloging Handbook H6-1, Section A. 220 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 100. Canadian Standard Z99 Modifications to American National Standard Y32.21975 (IEEE Std 315-1975) While not illustrated in the Standard itself, the widespread practice of using heavier lines in drawing certain symbols can, if followed, result in improved drawing readability. The practice is consistent with Clause A4.3. It is therefore recommended that heavier lines be used to show: 1.10 Envelopes 2.2 Capacitors 2.5 The negative plates of batteries and cells 4.3 The parallel lines in the (4.29 and 4.30) parallel contact symbols 4.7 The moving contact in the push button symbol 7.1 Indirectly heated cathode, anode and combinations including these 8.5 Base symbol as used for semiconductors These items are illustrated below: -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Additionally, it is recommended that the last symbol of Section 3.1.6.3 be avoided in all cases. Where space is at a premium, the possibility of misreading it as a crossover will usually be greater. Cross References For Graphical Electrical Symbols for Architectural Plans see Appendix F of CSA Standard C22.1-1975. 221 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Annex A Cross Reference List of Changed Item Numbers (Informative) (These appendixes are not part of American National Standard Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams (Including Reference Designation Class Designation Letters) Y32.2-1975 (IEEE Std 315-1975), but are included to facilitate its use.) ANSI Y32.2-1975 1.3.1 2.2.14 2.2.13 1.3.1.2 1.3.1 2.2.15 2.2.14 1.3.2.1 1.3.2 2.2.16 2.2.15 1.3.2.2 1.3.2 2.2.17 2.2.16 1.3.3 1.3.2 2.3.6.8 14.2.4.1 1.3.3.1 1.3.2 2.6.1 (top) 2.6.4 1.3.3.2 1.3.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.2.9 2.2.11 4.2.1.1 (bottom) 4.2.1.2 2.2.11 2.2.12 4.2.1.2 4.2.1.1 2.2.12 2.2.9 4.2.1.3 4.2.1.2 2.2.13 2.2.9.1 4.2.1.4 4.2.1.3 -- 1.3.1.1 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- ANSI Y32.2-1970 | | |||| | | ANSI Y32.2-1975 || ||| || || ANSI Y32.2-1970 222 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Annex B Reference Data -- International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) || ||| || || Publication 117: Recommended Graphical Symbols | | |||| | | (Informative) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- The following documents were used for the listing of the IEC symbols (IEC) next to those graphic symbols in this standard that are considered to be in accordance with the graphic symbols in Publication 117. Publication 117 Part No. 0 General Index (1973) 1 Kind of current, distribution systems, methods of connection and circuit elements (1960) Amendments: 1 (August 1966), 2 (August 1967), 3 (August 1973) 2 Machines, transformers, primary cells, and accumulators, transductors and magnetic amplifiers, inductors (1960) Amendments: 1 (August 1966), 2 (October 1971), 3 (August 1973) Supplement A (April 1974) 3 Contacts, switchgear, mechanical controls, starters, and elements of electromechanical relays (1963) Amendments: 1 (August 1966), 2 (March 1972), 3 (August 1973), 4 (May 1974) Supplements: A (April 1970), Second (1972) 4 Indicating instruments and electric clocks (1963) Amendments: 1 (October 1971), 2 August 1973), 3 (May 1974) 5 Generating stations and substations, lines for transmission and distribution (1963) Amendment 1 (August 1973) 6 Variability, examples of resistors, elements of electronic tubes, values and rectifiers (1964) Amendments: 1 (August 1966), 2 (December 1967), 3 (August 1973) 7 Semiconductor devices, capacitors (Second edition, 1971) 8 Architectural diagrams (1967) 9 Telephony, telegraphy, and transducers (1968) Supplements: First (1969), B (April 1971) 223 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 10 Aerials (antennas) and radio stations (1968) Supplement A (Nov 1969) 11 Microwave technology (1968) First supplement (1971) 12 Frequency spectrum diagrams (1968) 13 Block symbols for transmission and miscellaneous applications (1969) Supplements: First (1971), Second (1972), C (April 1974) 14 Telecommunication lines and accessories (1971) Supplement A (May 1974) 15 Binary logic elements (1972) 16 Ferrite Cores and magnetic storage matrices (1972) 224 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Annex C Revised or Deleted Symbols (Informative) Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2-1970 Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.2-1975 Revised 2.6.3 Bifilar slow-wave structure Commonly used in traveling-wave tubes. See item 2.6.4 Deleted Alternate 8.5.1 Semiconductor diode; semiconductor rectifier diode; metallic rectifier See item 8.5.1 Revised Alternate 8.5.2 Capacitive diode (varactor) See item 8.5.2 Style 2 Revised 8.11 Solid-State Thyratron (replacement type) 8.11.1 Balanced See item 8.11.1 8.11.2 Unbalanced See item 8.11.2 | | |||| | | See item 8.6.3 -- || ||| || || Deleted Alternate 8.6.3 NPN transistor with transverse-biased base |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Style 2 225 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Annex D Revised or Deleted Symbols (Informative) Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified Modified 1.7.2 Both ways See item 1.7.2 Expanded 2.1.12 Thermistor Thermal resistor F See item 2.1.12 2.1.12.1 General 2.1.12.2 With independent integral heater Revised 2.8 Permanent Magnet See item 2.8 F See item 3.1.9 Revised * 3.1.9 Coaxial cable, recognition symbol Coaxial transmission path Radio-frequency cable F (coaxial) NOTE — 3.1.9A: If necessary for clarity, an outer-conductor connection to the symbol shall be made where the broken line - — - is shown. 226 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 Revised and Expanded 4.21 Thermostat Ambient-temperature-operated device. Operates on rising temperature. Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified See items 4.21 through 4.21.7 4.21.1 With break contact See also item 4.20.2 4.21.2 With make contact See also item 4.20.2 4.21.3 With integral heater and transfer contacts Deleted 4.30 Relay See item 4.30 F Revised and Expanded 4.30.5 Thermal relay See items 4.30.5 through 4.30.6 F Revised See item 5.6.2 5.6.2 Coaxial with the outside conductor shown carried through 227 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 Revised Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified See item 5.6.3 5.6.3 Application: Coaxial with outside conductor shown carried through; with outside conductor terminated on chassis Revised See item 5.6.4 Revised See item 5.7.1 See Note 5.7A Deleted See item 5.7.4 Revised -- 5.7.4 Application: mated choke flanges in rectangular waveguide line See item 5.7.5 5.7.5 Application: rectangular waveguide with mated plain and choke flanges with direct-current isolation (insulation) between sections of waveguide. Revised 7.3.6 Cathode-ray tube 7.3.6.1 With electric-field deflection See items 7.3.6 through 7.3.6.2.2 7.3.6.2 For magnetic deflection 228 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | 5.7.1 Mated (general) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 5.6.4 Application: Coaxial with center conductor shown carried through; outside conductor not carried through Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Revised Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified See item 8.6.15 8.6.15 Thyristor, bidirectional triodetype; triac; gated switch Style 3 Revised and Expanded See item 9.1.3 9.1.2 High-voltage primary fuse cut-out, dry See item 9.1.2 Revised and Expanded 9.1.4 With alarm contact When fuse blows, alarm bus A is connected to power bus B. Letters are for explanation and are not part of the symbol. See item 10.4.1 Revised 10.4.1 General Revised See item 15.2.4 15.2.4 Coupling by loop from coaxial to circular waveguide with direct-current grounds connected 229 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 Revised Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified See item 15.2.7 15.2.7 Coupling by probe from coaxial to rectangular waveguide with direct-current grounds connected Revised 15.3.2 Application: E-plane aperture coupling, 30-decibel transmission loss See items 15.3.2 through 15.3.6 15.3.3 Application: loop coupling, 30-decibel transmission loss 15.3.4 Application: probe coupling, 30-decibel transmission loss 15.3.5 Application: resistance coupling, 30decibel transmission loss Revised See item 15.4.4 15.4.4.1 Application: 5-arm circular hybrid with principal coupling in the E plane and with 1-arm H coupling using rectangular waveguide 230 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 Deleted 15.4.5.1 Application: circulator, reversible direction The polarity symbol (item 1.6) must be used with electromagnet symbol to indicate proper direction flow. Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified See item 15.8.4.1 See item 15.5.3 Revised 15.5.3 Application: transducer from rectangular waveguide to coaxial with mode suppression and direct-current grounds connected. Revised 15.7.1.1 Application: coaxial type in rectangular waveguide system See item 15.7.1.1 -|| ||| || || Deleted See item 15.8.1 | | |||| | | 15.8.3 Unidirectional (isolator) Power flowing in direction of arrow is not intentionally attenuated. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Revised See item 15.9.2 15.9.2 Application: resonator with mode suppression coupled by an E-plane aperture to a guided transmission path and by a loop to a coaxial path 231 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 Revised Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified See item 15.9.3 15.9.3 Application: tunable resonator having adjustable Q coupled by a probe to a coaxial system Revised See item 15.11.1 15.11.1 Resonant type with coaxial output Revised See item 15.12.2 15.12.2 Double-cavity klystron, integral cavity, permanent externally-ganged tuning, loop coupled (coupling loop may be shown inside if desired) See item 7.1.7.1. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | Revised See item 15.14.1 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.14.1 Forward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with four grids, having slowwave structure with attenuation, magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf input and rf output coupling, each by E-plane aperture to external rectangular waveguide 232 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 Revised Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified See item 15.14.2 -- 15.14.2 Forward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with four grids, having slowwave structure with attenuation, magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf input and rf output coupling, each by inductive coupling || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Revised See item 15.14.3 15.14.3 Forward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with four grids, having slowwave structure with attenuation, external electromagnetic focusing rf input and rf output coupling-each by external cavity and loop coupling, to a coaxial path Revised See item 15.14.4 15.14.4 Forward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with four grids, having slowwave structure with attenuation, magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf input and rf output coupling, each by direct connection from slow-wave structure to a coaxial path 233 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 Revised Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified See item 15.14.6 15.14.6 Backward-wave traveling-wave-tube amplifier shown with two grids, having slowwave structure with attenuation, sole (beamaligning electrode), magnetic focusing be external permanent magnet, rf input and rf output coupling, each by E-plane aperture to external rectangular waveguide Revised See item 15.14.7 15.14.7 Backward-wave traveling-wave-tube oscillator shown with two grids, having slowwave structure with attenuation, sole (beamaligning electrode), magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf output coupling by inductive coupling Revised See item 15.14.8 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- 234 || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.14.8 Backward-wave traveling-wave-tube oscillator shown with two grids, having slowwave structure with attenuation, sole (beamaligning electrode), magnetic focusing by external permanent magnet, rf output coupling by inductive coupling, with slowwave structure connected internally to collector ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Symbols Formerly in USAS Y32.2-1967 Deleted Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.21975, if Not Otherwise Specified See item 16.1.1 16.1.1.3 Additional letter combinations, as follows, may be employed, but the use of specific graphic symbols included elsewhere in this standard is preferred AR Amplifier F AT Attenuator C Capacitor F CB Circuit breaker F HS Handset F I Indicating or switchboard lamp L Inductor J Jack LS Loudspeaker F MIC Microphone F OSC Oscillator PAD Pad P Plug HT Receiver, headset K Relay F R Resistor F S Switch F or key switch T Transformer F WR Wall receptacle -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- *The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 235 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Annex E Revised or Deleted Symbols (Informative) -- Symbols Formerly in USA Standard Y32.21962 & Supplement Y32.2A-1964 or MIL-STD-15-1A (including original item numbers) || ||| || || Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.2 1975, if Not Otherwise Specified | | |||| | | See ANSI Y14.15-1966 Corrected 34.11.10.2 Double-cavity klystron, integral cavity, permanent external-ganged tuning, loop coupled (coupling loop may be shown inside if desired) See item 34.8.1 See item 15.12.2 Revised and Expanded 42.7 Saturable-core inductor (reactor) Polarity marks may be added to direct-current winding. Explanatory words and arrow are not part of the symbols shown. See item 6.3 Revised 48 Meter Instrument T See item 12.1 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Deleted 11.3.1 On a connection or wiring diagram, a 3-pole single-throw circuit breaker (with terminals shown) may be drawn as shown below 236 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Temperature meter Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Symbols Formerly in USA Standard Y32.21962 & Supplement Y32.2A-1964 or MIL-STD-15-1A (including original item numbers) Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.2 1975, if Not Otherwise Specified See item 15.5.3 Corrected 58.8.2 Coaxial cable, recognition symCoaxial transmission path Cable, radio frequency F , (Coaxial) See item 58.1. See item 3.1.9 Corrected 58.8.4 Shielded 2-conductor cable with shield grounded See item 3.1.8.4 Corrected 71.2.1 Resonator with mode suppression coupled by an E-plane aperture to a guided transmission path and by a loop to a coaxial path. See item 15.9.2 Revised 76.12.7 Wafer, 3-pole 3-circuit with 2 nonshorting and 1 shorting moving contacts Viewed from end opposite control knob or actuator unless otherwise indicated. For more than one section, section No. 1 is nearest control knob. When contacts are on both sides, front contacts are nearest control knob. See item 4.13.7 -- Corrected 53.3 Application: transducer from rectangular waveguide to coaxial with mode suppression and direct-current grounds connected || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 237 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Symbols Formerly in USA Standard Y32.21962 & Supplement Y32.2A-1964 or MILSTD-15-1A (including original item numbers) Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.2 1975, if Not Otherwise Specified Deleted 81.5 Applications NOTES: 81.5A — If the device terminals are in a circular arrangement, the actual angular spacing between the terminals should be approximated on the terminal diagram. See ANSI Y14.15-1966 81.5B — If the terminals are in an essentially linear arrangement the terminal diagram may show the terminals in either a linear array along one side of the elongated envelope symbol (preferable), or within a maximum angle of 150 degrees around the circular envelope symbol. 81.5C — If pins are omitted in an otherwise standard terminal arrangement, do not respace the remaining pins. 81.5D — A terminal at the center of the terminal arrangement shall be identified as the CENTER terminal lead or pin. 81.5E — The typical examples show pin numbering in accordance with standard industry practice, i.e., with the terminals viewed from outside the terminal face of the device. 81.5.1 Two-terminal device with one flexible lead and one rigid terminal connected to a metallic envelope (typical semiconductor diode shown). 81.5.2 Two-terminal device with rigid terminals and reference point located at one of the terminals (typical semiconductor diode shown). 81.5.3 Three-terminal device with circular arrangement of pin terminals with base orientation determined by gap in pin spacing (typical transistor shown). 238 -- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Symbols Formerly in USA Standard Y32.21962 & Supplement Y32.2A-1964 or MILSTD-15-1A (including original item numbers) Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.2 1975, if Not Otherwise Specified Deleted (continued) See ANSI Y14.15-1966 81.5.4 Three-terminal device with rigid terminals, one connected to the metallic enclosure, and index pin (typical transistor shown). | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 81.5.5 Four-terminal device with in-line pin terminals, one connected to metallic envelope, and reference point (typical transistor shown). -- || ||| || || 81.5.6 Five-terminal device with in-line terminal leads, one connected to metallic enclosure and reference point (typical relay shown). 81.5.7 Device with 8-terminal keyed (such as octal) base, rigid envelope terminal, and magnetic envelope connected to base terminal (typical triode-heptode shown). 239 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Symbols Formerly in USA Standard Y32.21962 & Supplement Y32.2A-1964 or MILSTD-15-1A (including original item numbers) Recommended Symbols in ANSI Y32.2 1975, if Not Otherwise Specified Deleted (continued) 81.5.8 Device with keyed (such as octal) base having design capability of 8 pins but with 2 pins omitted, and with 3 rigid envelope terminals (typical disc-seal triode shown). 81.5.9 Device with 9-terminal (such as noval) base utilizing gap in pin spacing to establish base orientation (typical twin triode shown). See items 1.2.1 and 2.1.12 Revised 84.1 General See item 2.1.12.1 Revised 85.2.1 Temperature-measuring semiconductor thermocouple See item 8.8.1 Corrected 86.1.1 Application: transformer with directcurrent connections and mode suppression between two rectangular waveguides See item 6.4.1.1 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Revised 84 Thermistor Resistor, Thermal F “T” indicates that the primary characteristic of the element within the circle is a function of temperature. 240 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 Annex F Cross-Reference List of Class Designation Letters (Informative) IEC Publication 113-2 (1971) Item Designations, Letter Codes ANSI Y32.2-1975 (IEEE Std 315-1975), Section 22, Class Designation Letters No conflict between ANSI Y32.2 and IEC. ANSI Y32.2 not in agreement with IEC, but no conflict if used. ANSI Y32.2 conflicts with IEC as IEC uses class letter to represent other devices. IEC Y32.2 # Acoustical indicator H LS * Adjustable resistor R R @ Aerial W E # Amplifier A AR # Amplifier (with tubes) A AR @ Arrester F E * Assemblies A A,U * Auxiliary switch S S # Battery G BT # Bistable element D U,A # Brake Y MP * Busbar W W * Cable W W * Cable balancing network Z Z * Capacitor C C # Changer U A,B,G,MT # Circuit breaker Q CB # Clutch Y MP * Coder U U,A # Compander Z A * Connecting stage S S * Contactors K K * Control switch S S * Converter U A,U,MG @ Core, storage D E -- Terminology |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Letter Code | | |||| | | IEC Publication 113-2 || ||| || || * # @ 241 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR IEC Publication 113-2 -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 242 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Letter Code Terminology IEC Y32.2 # Crystal filter Z FL @ Crystal transducer B Y * Current transformer T T # Delay device D DL # Delay line D DL # Demodulator U A * Dial contact S S @ Diode V D @ Dipole W E @ Disconnecting plug X P * Disconnecting socket X X # Discriminator U A # Disk recorder D A # Dynamotor B MG # Electrically operated mechanical device Y MT * Electronic tube V V # Equalizer Z EQ # Filter Z FL # Frequency changer U A,B,G * Fuse F F * Gas discharge tube V V * Generator G G # Heating device E HR * Hybrid Z Z # Indicating device P DS * Induction coil L L * Inductors L L # Integrating measuring device P M,MT,Z # Inverter U A,U,PS,MG # Isolator Q AT * Jumper wire W W # Laser A MT,A # Lighting device E DS * Limit switch S S Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 IEC Publication 113-2 Letter Code Terminology IEC Y32.2 # Limiter Z MT,RE @ Line trap L FL,MP,V # Loudspeaker B LS # Magnetic amplifier A AR # Magnetic tape recorder D A * Maser A A @ Measuring equipment P M # Microphone B MK * Miscellaneous E E # Modulator U A # Monostable element D A,U @ Motor M B # Optical indicator H DS @ Oscillator G Y,G * Overvoltage discharge device F F,E @ Parabolic aerial W E @ Photoelectric cell B V # Pickup B PU @ Plug X P # Pneumatic value Y MP * Potentiometer R R @ Power switchgear Q CB,S * Protective device F F * Pushbutton S S @ Quartz-oscillator G Y # Recording device P A,M # Register D A,U,M * Relay K K * Resistor R R * Resolver B B * Rheostat R R * Rotating frequency generator G G,MG * Rotating generator G G * Selector S S 243 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 Letter Code IEC Y32.2 * Selector switch S S #, @ Semiconductor V D,CR,Q * Shunt (resistor) R R # Signal generator P A # Signaling device H DS * Socket X X # Soldering terminal strip X E,TB # Static frequency changer U A # Storage device D A,U * Subassembly A A # Supply G A,PS # Supply device G A,PS * Sychro B B # Telegraph translator U A @ Terminal X E # Terminal board X TB # Termination Z AT # Test jack X E,J # Testing equipment P A # Thermistor R RT # Thermo cell B A,TC # Thermoelectric sensor B A # Thyristor V Q # Transducer (nonelectrical quantity to electrical quantity) B A,BT * Transformer T T * Transmission path W W @ Transistor V Q * Tube (electron) V V * Voltage transformer (potential) T T * Waveguide W W # Waveguide directional coupler W DC COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- 244 || ||| || || | | |||| | | Terminology |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- IEC Publication 113-2 IEEE Std 315A-1986 (Supplement to IEEE Std 315-1975 and ANSI Y32.2-1975 IEEE Standard American National Standard Supplement to Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams Sponsor IEEE Standards Coordinating Committee 11, Graphic Symbols Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. -|| ||| || || Approved September 19, 1985 Reaffirmed December 2, 1993 IEEE Standards Board | | |||| | | Approved November 15, 1985 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- American National Standards Institute Copyright © 1975 by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher. However, individual symbols contained in this standard may be utilized without further permission of the IEEE. Any statement that the symbols used are in conformance with this standard shall be on the user’s own responsibility. COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Standards documents are developed within the Technical Committees of the IEEE Societies and the Standards Coordinating Committees of the IEEE Standards Board. Members of the committees serve voluntarily and without compensation. They are not necessarily members of the Institute. The standards developed within IEEE represent a consensus of the broad expertise on the subject within the Institute as well as those activities outside of IEEE which have expressed an interest in participating in the development of the standard. Comments on standards and requests for interpretation should be addressed to: Secretary, IEEE Standards Board 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 USA The individual symbols contained in this standard may be copied, reproduced, or employed in any fashion without permission of the IEEE. Any statement that the symbols used are in conformance with this standard shall be on the user’s own responsibility. COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. | | |||| | | || ||| || || Interpretations: Occasionally questions may arise regarding the meaning of portions of standards as they relate to specific applications. When the need for interpretations is brought to the attention of IEEE, the Institute will initiate action to prepare appropriate responses. Since IEEE Standards represent a consensus of all concerned interests, it is important to ensure that any interpretation has also received the concurrence of a balance of interests. For this reason IEEE and the members of its technical committees are not able to provide an instant response to interpretation requests except in those cases where the matter has previously received formal consideration. -- Comments for revision of IEEE Standards are welcome from any interested party, regardless of membership affiliation with IEEE. Suggestions for changes in documents should be in the form of a proposed change of text, together with appropriate supporting comments. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Use of an IEEE Standard is wholly voluntary. The existence of an IEEE Standard does not imply that there are no other ways to produce, test, measure, purchase, market, or provide other goods and services related to the scope of the IEEE Standard. Furthermore, the viewpoint expressed at the time a standard is approved and issued is subject to change brought about through developments in the state of the art and comments received from users of the standard. Every IEEE Standard is subjected to review at least once every five years for revision or reaffirmation. When a document is more than five years old, and has not been reaffirmed, it is reasonable to conclude that its contents, although still of some value, do not wholly reflect the present state of the art. Users are cautioned to check to determine that they have the latest edition of any IEEE Standard. Foreword (This Foreword is not a part of ANSI/IEEE Std 315A-1986, Supplement to Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams.) This standard supplements ANSI/IEEE Std 315-1975 by providing symbols approved by the International Electrotechnical Commission since 1975, or for which there is now a greater need in the United States arising from international commerce. It is believed that immediate issue of this supplement is preferable to the inevitable delay that would occur if a complete and proper revision of ANSI/IEEE Std 315-1975 were undertaken. Besides adding new symbols, some updating of the information in ANSI/IEEE Std 315-1975 has been undertaken. The updating includes references to other standards, IEC labels on symbols where a change has occured, and correction of errors. This supplement is based on IEC Publication 617, Parts 2 through 11 and Part 13 as published in 1983. IEC Publication 617, Part 12 is included in full in ANSI/IEEE Std 91-1984, IEEE Standard Graphic Symbols for Logic Functions. When this standard was approved the Subcommittee on Graphic Symbols SCC 11.1 had the following membership: G. A. Knapp H. H. Seaman I. M. Berger J. M. Kreher G. Shapiro L. Burns F. R. Misiewicz J. W. Siefert R. Coel C. R. Muller S. V. Soanes J. B. Deam C. McCarthy R. M. Stern L. Davis R. Pinger M. E. Taylor A.C. Gannett A. I. Rubin R. J. Yuhas -- C. J. Andrasco || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- L. Schulz When this standard was approved the IEEE Standards Coordinating Committee on Graphic Symbols and Designations SCC 11 had the following membership: Robert B. Angus, Jr. Conrad R. Muller S. V. Soanes J. C. Brown John B. Peatman Roger M. Stern John M. Carroll J. William Siefert Leter H. Warren Gordon A. Knapp Thomas R. Smith Steven A. Wasserman iii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. When the IEEE Standards Board approved this standard on September 19, 1985, it had the following membership: John E. May, Chair John P. Riganati, Vice Chair Sava I. Sherr, Secretary James H. Beall Jay Forster Lawrence V. McCall Fletcher H. Buckley Daniel L. Goldberg Donald T. Michael* Rene Castenschiold Kenneth D. Hendrix Frank L. Rose Edward Chelotti Irvin N. Howell Clifford O. Swanson Edward J. Cohen Jack Kinn J. Richard Weger Paul G. Cummings Joseph L. Koepfinger* W. B. Wilkens Donald C. Fleckenstein Irving Kolodny Charles J. Wylie R. F. Lawrence *Member emeritus iv -- || ||| || || COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE AA1 Purpose .......................................................................................................................................... 254 AA2 Scope ............................................................................................................................................. 254 AA3 Organization .................................................................................................................................. 254 AA4 References ..................................................................................................................................... 254 Section 1 Qualifying Symbols 1.1 Adjustability Variability ......................................................................................................................................... 256 1.2 Special-Property Indicators.............................................................................................................. 256 1.3 Radiation Indicators (electromagnetic and particulate) ................................................................... 257 1.4 Physical State Recognition Symbols................................................................................................ 258 1.7 Direction of Flow of Power, Signal, or Information ........................................................................ 258 1.8 Kind of Current ............................................................................................................................... 260 1.10 Envelope Enclosure ........................................................................................................................................ 261 1.14 Operational Dependence On a Characteristic Quantity ................................................................. 261 1.15 Signal Identifiers ............................................................................................................................ 262 1.16 Signal Waveforms .......................................................................................................................... 262 1.17 Control by Nonelectrical Quantities............................................................................................... 263 Section 2 Graphic Symbols for Fundamental Items (not included in other sections) 2.1 Resistor............................................................................................................................................. 264 2.2 Capacitor .......................................................................................................................................... 264 2.3 Antenna ........................................................................................................................................... 265 2.4 Attenuator......................................................................................................................................... 267 2.6 Delay Function Delay Line Slow-Wave Structure ....................................................................................................................... 268 2.9 Pickup Head ................................................................................................................................................. 270 2.10 Piezoelectric Crystal Unit (including Crystal Unit, Quartz ) ......................................................... 270 2.17 Ignitor Plug .................................................................................................................................... 271 2.18 Signal Waveforms .......................................................................................................................... 271 2.19 Faults .............................................................................................................................................. 272 Section 3 Graphic Symbols for Transmission Path 3.1 Transmission Path Conductor Cable Wiring .............................................................................................................................................. 272 3.2 Distribution Lines Transmission Lines.......................................................................................................................... 274 3.6 Waveguide ....................................................................................................................................... 277 3.10 Pressure Tight Bulkhead Cable Gland Cable Sealing End .......................................................................................................................... 278 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | v |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE Section 4 Graphic Symbols for Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays -- Section 6 Graphic Symbols for Transformers, Inductors, and Windings | | |||| | | 5.3 Connector Disconnecting Device Jack Plug ................................................................................................................................................. 301 5.6 Coaxial Connector Coaxial Junction .............................................................................................................................. 304 || ||| || || Section 5 Graphic Symbols for Terminals and Connectors |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.1 Switching Function .......................................................................................................................... 278 4.3 Basic Contact Assemblies................................................................................................................ 279 4.6 Switch............................................................................................................................................... 284 4.14 Limit Switch Sensitive Switch ............................................................................................................................ 286 4.21 Thermostat ..................................................................................................................................... 286 4.22 Flasher Self-Interrupting Switch................................................................................................................. 287 4.29 Contactor........................................................................................................................................ 287 4.34 Multipole and Multiposition Switches........................................................................................... 288 4.35 Switchgear and Controlgear........................................................................................................... 295 4.36 Block Symbols for Motor Starters ................................................................................................. 296 4.37 Operating Devices for Electromechanical (all or nothing) Relays ............................................................................................................................................ 298 6.1 Core.................................................................................................................................................. 304 6.2 Inductor Winding (machine or transformer) Reactor Radio-Frequency Coil Telephone Retardation Coil............................................................................................................. 305 6.4 Transformer Telephone Induction Coil Telephone Repeating Coil................................................................................................................ 306 6.6 Ferrite Cores—Symbol Elements .................................................................................................... 317 6.7 Ferrite Cores..................................................................................................................................... 318 6.8 Magnetic Storage Matrices (Topographical Representation)........................................................... 319 Section 7 Graphic Symbols for Electron Tubes and Related Devices 7.1 Electron Tube .................................................................................................................................. 319 7.3 Typical Applications ........................................................................................................................ 324 7.4 Solion Ion-Diffusion Device........................................................................................................................ 325 7.5 Coulomb Accumulator Electrochemical Step-Function Device ............................................................................................ 326 vi COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE 7.7 Nuclear-Radiation Detector Ionization Chamber Proportional Counter Tube Geiger-Müller Counter Tube ........................................................................................................... 327 Section 8 Graphic Symbols for Semiconductor Devices 8.2 Element Symbols ............................................................................................................................. 328 8.3 Special-Property Indicators.............................................................................................................. 331 8.5 Typical Applications, Two-Terminal Devices .................................................................................. 332 8.6 Typical Applications, Three- (or more) Terminal Devices .............................................................. 337 8.10 Photon-Coupled Isolator ................................................................................................................ 344 8.12 Ionizing Radiation Detectors ......................................................................................................... 345 -- Section 9 Graphic Symbols for Circuit Protectors || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.1 Fuse ................................................................................................................................................. 346 9.3 Lightning Arrester Arrester (electric surge, etc) Gap................................................................................................................................................... 347 9.4 Circuit Breaker ................................................................................................................................ 348 9.6 Protective Relays—Block Symbols and Qualifying Symbol........................................................... 350 9.7 Examples of Protective Relays......................................................................................................... 352 9.8 Other Relays Devices....................................................................................................................... 354 Section 10 Graphic Symbols for Acoustic Devices 10.1 Audible-Signaling Device.............................................................................................................. 355 Section 11 Graphic Symbols for Lamps and Visual-Signaling Devices 11.1 Lamp .............................................................................................................................................. 356 11.3 Electromechanical Signal............................................................................................................... 357 Section 12 Graphic Symbols for Readout Devices 12.1 Meter Instrument ...................................................................................................................................... 357 12.2 Electromagnetically Operated Counter Message Register .......................................................................................................................... 358 12.3 Indicating, Recording, and Integrating Instruments, General Symbols ......................................... 358 12.4 Examples of Indicating Instruments .............................................................................................. 360 12.5 Examples of Recording Instruments .............................................................................................. 362 12.6 Examples of Integrating Instruments ............................................................................................. 362 12.7 Counting Devices ........................................................................................................................... 365 12.8 Telemetering Devices..................................................................................................................... 366 12.9 Electric Clocks ............................................................................................................................... 366 Section 13 Graphic Symbols for Rotating Machinery 13.1 Rotating Machine........................................................................................................................... 367 13.5 Applications: Alternating-Current Machines................................................................................. 367 13.6 Applications: Alternating-Current Machines with Direct-Current Field Excitation ..................... 368 vii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE Section 14 Graphic Symbols for Mechanical Functions 14.2 Mechanical Motion ........................................................................................................................ 368 14.3 Clutch Brake............................................................................................................................................... 370 14.4 Manual Control .............................................................................................................................. 371 14.5 Detents, Latching, and Blocking.................................................................................................... 374 Section 15 Graphic Symbols Commonly Used in Connection with VHF, UHF, and SHF Circuits 15.2 Coupling......................................................................................................................................... 375 15.4 Hybrid Directionally Selective Transmission Devices................................................................................ 375 15.5 Mode Transducer............................................................................................................................ 376 15.6 Mode Suppressor............................................................................................................................ 376 15.7 Rotary Joint (radio-frequency rotary coupler ) .............................................................................. 376 15.8 Nonreciprocal Devices ................................................................................................................... 376 15.9 Resonator Tuned Cavity ................................................................................................................................. 377 15.10 Resonator (cavity-type) Tube....................................................................................................... 378 15.11 Magnetron .................................................................................................................................... 379 15.12 Velocity-Modulation (velocity-variation) Tube ........................................................................... 380 15.13 Transmit-Receive (TR) Tube........................................................................................................ 382 15.14 Traveling-Wave-Tube................................................................................................................... 382 15.16 Filter ............................................................................................................................................. 386 15.20 Multiport Devices..........................................................................................................................386 15.21 Lasers and Masers........................................................................................................................ 387 17.10 Analog Elements for Computations and Control......................................................................... 395 -- Section 18 Graphic Symbols for Digital Logical Funtions | | |||| | | Section 17 Graphic Symbols for Analog and Digital Logic Functions || ||| || || 16.1 Circuit Assembly Circuit Subassembly Circuit Element.............................................................................................................................. 389 16.2 Amplifier ....................................................................................................................................... 390 16.9 Gyro Gyroscope Gyrocompass.................................................................................................................................. 390 16.13 Changer, General Symbol—Converter General Symbol ............................................................. 391 16.14 Galvanic Seperator ....................................................................................................................... 392 16.15 Heat Source, General Symbol...................................................................................................... 392 16.16 Generator, General Symbol.......................................................................................................... 392 16.17 Sensors and Detectors .................................................................................................................. 394 16.18 Applications of Sensors ............................................................................................................... 394 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Section 16 Graphic Symbols for Composite Assemblies No changes viii COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. CLAUSE PAGE Section 19 Graphic Symbols for Special-Purpose Maintenance Diagrams 21.1 Generating Station.......................................................................................................................... 404 21.2 Hydroelectric Generating Station................................................................................................... 405 21.3 Thermoelectric Generating Station ................................................................................................ 406 21.4 Prime Mover (qualifying symbols) ................................................................................................ 407 21.5 Substation....................................................................................................................................... 408 21.6 Wind Generating Station................................................................................................................ 408 21.7 Plasma Generating Station ............................................................................................................. 409 Section 22 Class Designation Letters No changes Section 23 Referenced Standards See AA4 Section 24 Telecommunications Switching and Peripheral Equipment 24.1 Switching Systems ..........................................................................................................................409 24.2 Block Symbols for Switching Equipment...................................................................................... 413 24.3 Qualifying Symbols for Transducers, Recorders, and Reproducers .............................................. 413 24.4 Recorders and Reproducers ........................................................................................................... 414 Section 25 Telecommunications Transmission 25.1 Amplified Circuits.......................................................................................................................... 415 25.2 Qualifying Symbols for Pulse Modulation .................................................................................... 416 25.3 Signal Generator, Waveform Generator ......................................................................................... 417 25.4 Changers, Converter, General Symbol........................................................................................... 418 25.5 Filters ............................................................................................................................................. 418 25.6 Networks ........................................................................................................................................ 419 25.7 Electronic Chopping Device .......................................................................................................... 422 25.8 Threshold Devices.......................................................................................................................... 422 25.9 Terminating Sets............................................................................................................................. 424 25.10 Modulator, Demodulator, Discriminator...................................................................................... 425 25.11 Concentrators, Multiplexers......................................................................................................... 426 25.12 Frequency Spectrum Diagram Symbol Elements ........................................................................ 427 25.13 Examples of Frequency Spectrum Diagrams............................................................................... 430 25.14 Fiber Optic Devices...................................................................................................................... 432 ix COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. | | |||| | | Section 21 Graphic Symbols Commonly Used on System Diagrams, Maps, and Charts || ||| || || 20.3 Exchange Equipment (Relocation of 20.3.2 and 20.3.3) ............................................................... 404 -- Section 20 Graphic Symbols Commonly Used on System Diagrams, Maps, and Charts (Communications Equipment |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- No changes American National Standard IEEE Standard Supplement to Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams AA1. Purpose This supplement is intended to provide additional graphic symbols and information on internationally approved graphic symbols needed for use for electrical and electronics diagrams. AA2. Scope This supplement provides graphic symbols for use of all electrical or electronics diagrams except for those required for 1) 2) 3) Logic circuit diagrams. See ANSI/IEEE Std 91-1984 [4].30 Architectural plans. See ANSI Y32.9-1972 [2] and IEC Publication 617 (1983) [22] Part 11, ch IV. Street maps and building system layouts for cable TV application. See ANSI/IEEE Std 623-1976 [8] and IEC Publication 617 (1983) [22], Part 11, ch III. AA3. Organization This supplement places the IEC Publication 617 new material in a practical sequence with related material in ANSI/ IEEE Std 315-1975 [7]. Except where the nature of the revisions dictate otherwise (for reasons of clarity) existing ANSI/IEEE Std 315-1975 [7] text is not repeated. AA4. References This standard shall be used in conjunction with the following publications: [1] ANSI Y1.1-1972 (R 1984), Abbreviations for Use On the Drawings and In Text.31 [2] ANSI Y32.9-1972, American National Standard Graphic Symbols for Electrical Wiring and Layout Diagrams Used in Architecture and Building Construction. [3] ANSI/IEEE Std C37.2-1979, IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers.32 [4] ANSI/IEEE Std 91-1984, IEEE Standard Graphic Symbols for Logic Functions. 30 Numbers in brackets correspond to those of the references listed in Section AA4. 31 ANSI publications are available from the Sales Department, American National Standards 32 Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. IEEE publications are available from IEEE Service Center, 445 Hoes Lane, Piscataway, NJ 08854. 254 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 [5] ANSI/IEEE Std 260-1978, IEEE Standard Letter Symbols for Units of Measurement. [6] ANSI/IEEE Std 280-1985, IEEE Standard Letter Symbols for Quantities Used in Electrical Science and Electrical Engineering. [7] ANSI/IEEE Std 315-1975, Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams. [8] ANSI/IEEE Std 623-1976, Graphic Symbols for Grid and Mapping Diagrams Used in Cable Television Systems. [9] IEC Publication 27-1 (1971) Part 1: General. Letter Symbols to be Used in Electrical Technology.33 [10] IEC Publication 417 (1973), Graphic Symbols for Use on Equipment. [11] IEC Publication 445 (1973), Identification of Apparatus Terminals and General Rules for a Uniform System of Terminal Marking, Using an Alphanumeric Notation. [12] IEC Publication 617-1 (1985) Part 1: General Information, General Index. Cross-Reference Tables. [13] IEC Publication 617-2 (1983) Part 2: Symbol Elements, Qualifying Symbols and Other Symbols Having General Application. [14] IEC Publication 617-3 (1983) Part 3: Conductors and Connecting Devices. [15] IEC Publication 617-4 (1983) Part 4: Passive Components. [16] IEC Publication 617-5 (1983) Part 5: Semiconductors and Tubes. [17] IEC Publication 617-6 (1983) Part 6: Production and Conversion of Electrical Energy. -|| ||| || || [18] IEC Publication 617-7 (1983) Part 7: Switchgear, Controlgear, and Protective Devices. | | |||| | | [19] IEC Publication 617-8 (1983) Part 8: Measuring Instruments, Lamps, and Signaling Devices. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- [20] IEC Publication 617-9 (1983) Part 9: Telecommunications: Switching and Peripheral Equipment. [21] IEC Publication 617-10 (1983) Part 10: Telecommunications: Transmission. [22] IEC Publication 617-11 (1983) Part 11: Architectural and Topographical Installation Plans and Diagrams. [23] IEC Publication 617-12 (1983) Part 12: Binary Logic Elements. [24] IEC Publication 617-13 (1978) Part 13: Analog Elements. [25] ISO 31, Parts 0-11 (1974-1980), Quantities, Units, Symbols, Conversion Factors, and Conversion Tables.34 33 IEC Publications are available in the United States from the Sales Department, American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018, USA. The IEC publications are also available from International Electrotechnical Commission, 3, rue de varembé, Case postale 131, CH 1211-Geneva 20, Switzerland. 34 ISO publications are available in the United States from the Sales Department, American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018, USA. ISO publications are also available from the International Organization for Standardization, 1, rue de Varembé, Case postale 56, CH 1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland. 255 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 1. Qualifying Symbols 1.1.1.2 Preset, general Add: Information on the conditions under which adjustment is permitted may be shown near the symbol. 1.1.1.2.1 Application: preset adjustment permitted only at zero current. After 1.1.4.2 Add: 1.1.5 Automatic (inherent) control The controlled quantity may be indicated adjacent to the symbol. 1.1.5.1 Application: Amplifier with automatic gain control 1.2.1 Temperature dependence 256 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 After 1.2.5 Add: 1.2.6 Thermal effect 1.2.7 Electromagnetic effect 1.2.8 Magnetostrictive effect After 1.3.1 Add: 1.3.1.1 Coherent radiation, non-ionizing (for example coherent light) 1.3.2 Radiation, ionizing Revise the NOTE to read as follows: NOTE — 1.3.2A: If it is necessary to show the specific type of ionizing radiation, the symbols may be augmented by the addition of symbols or letters such as the following: Alpha particle Beta particle Gamma ray Deutron Proton Neutron Pion K-meson Muon X ray α β γ d p n π K µ X Add: IEC Designations α = alpha particle Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 257 IEEE Std 315-1975 β γ δ ρ η π κ µ X GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR = beta particle = gamma ray = deuteron = proton = neutron = pion = K meson = muon = X ray 1.4.3 Solid -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- After 1.4.5 Add: 1.4.6 Material, semiconducting 1.4.7 Material, insulating 1.7 Direction of Flow of Power, Signal, or Information Avoid conflict with symbols 9.5, 9.5.2, and 9.5.4 if used on the same diagram 1.7.1 One-way NOTE — 1.7.1A: The lower symbol is used if it is necessary to conserve space. The arrowhead in the lower symbol shall be filled. 258 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 1.7.2 Either way (but not simultaneously) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 1.7.3 Both ways, simultaneously Avoid conflict with symbol 9.2 if used on the same diagram After 1.7.5 NOTE — 1.7.6A: The dot may be omitted if the sense is unambiguously given by the arrowhead in combination with the symbol to which it is applied. 259 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- 1.7.6 Transmission || ||| || || | | |||| | | Add: IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 1.7.7 Reception See NOTE 1.7.6A -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 1.7.8 Energy flow from the busbars |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 1.7.9 Energy flow towards the busbars 1.7.10 Bidirectional energy flow 1.8.1 Add: The voltage may be indicated at the right of the symbol and the type of system at the left. 1.8.1.1 Application: Direct current, three conductors including midwire, 220 V (110 V between each outer conductor and midwire) 2M may be replaced by 2 + M 1.8.2 Alternating current Add: The numerical value of the frequency or the frequency range may be added at the right-hand side of the symbol. The voltage may also be indicated to the right of the symbol. The number of phases and the presence of a neutral may be indicated at the left-hand side of the symbol. 1.8.2.1 Application: Alternating current of 60 Hz 260 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 1.8.2.2 Application: Alternating current frequency range 100 kHz to 600 kHz 1.8.2.3 Application: Alternating current: three-phase with neutral, 60 Hz, 480 V (277 V between phase and neutral). 3N may be replaced by 3 + N 1.8.2.4 Neutral This symbol for neutral is given in IEC Publication 445 (1973) [11]. 1.8.2.5 Midwire This symbol for midwire is given in IEC Publication 445 (1973) [11]. After 1.10.4 Add: 1.10.5 Conductive coating on internal surface of envelope Add: 1.14 Operational Dependence On a Characteristic Qauntity 1.14.1 Operating when the characteristic quantity is higher than the setting value 1.14.2 Operating when the characteristic quantity is lower than the setting value 261 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315-1975 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 1.14.3 Operating when the characteristic quantity is either higher than a given high setting or lower than a given low setting 1.14.4 Operating when value of the characteristic quantity becomes zero 1.14.5 Operating when the value of the characteristic quantity differs from zero by an amount which is very small compared to with the normal value 1.15 Signal Identifiers The symbol shall be used only when it is necessary to distinguish between analog and digital signals. 1.15.1 Identifier of analog signals 1.15.2 Identifier of digital signals A time-sequence number (m) of bits may be denoted m #. 1.16 Signal Waveforms Each symbol represents an idealized shape of the waveform. 1.16.1 Positive-going pulse 1.16.2 Negative-going pulse 1.16.3 Pulse of alternating current 262 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315-1975 1.16.4 Positive-going step function 1.16.5 Negative-going step function 1.16.6 Sawtooth 1.17 Control by Nonelectrical Quantities Letter symbols from ANSI/IEEE Std 280-1985 [6], may be used to denote other operating quantities than those shown below (for example pressure or speed). They should be enclosed in a rectangle if ambiguity could otherwise arise. 1.17.1 Control by fluid level 1.17.2 Control by number of events Control by a counter 1.17.3 Control by flow 1.17.3.1 Application: Control by gas flow 1.17.4 Control by relative humidity Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | 263 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 2.1.4 Add: 2.1.4.1 Application: preset adjustable resistor 2.1.7 Magnetoresistor (intrinsic) (linear type shown) After 2.1.9 Add: 2.1.9.1 Shunt Resistor with separate current and voltage terminals 2.1.13 Symmetrical photoconductive transducer (resistive) After 2.2.2 Add: 2.2.2.1 Temperature dependent polarized capacitor, where deliberate use is made of the temperature coefficient, for example, ceramic capacitor. 264 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 NOTE — 2.2.2.1A: θ may be replaced by t°. 2.2.2.2 Voltage dependent polarized capacitor, where deliberate use is made of the voltage dependent characteristic, for example, semiconductor capacitor NOTE — 2.2.2.2A: U may be replaced by V. After 2.2.4 Add: 2.2.4A Capacitor with preset adjustment 2.2.4.1 With moving element indicated Revise NOTE 2.2.4.1A to read as follows: NOTE — 2.2.4.1A: If it is desired to indicate the moving element, the common intersection of the moving element with the symbol for variability and the connecting line is marked with a dot. See General Symbols 2.2.1 and NOTE 2.2B After 2.3.2 Add: 2.3.2.1 Folded dipole 265 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.3.2.2 Folded dipole, shown with three directors and one reflector After 2.3.3 Add: 2.3.3.1 Slot antenna, shown with rectangular waveguide feeder || ||| || || -- 2.3.3.3 Cheese (box) reflector with horn feed, shown with rectangular waveguide feeder | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.3.3.2 Horn antenna Horn feed 2.3.3.4 Paraboloidal antenna, shown with retangular waveguide feeder 2.3.3.5 Horn-reflector antenna, shown with circular waveguide feeder 266 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 2.3.3.6 Rhombic antenna, shown terminated by a resistor -|| ||| || || 2.3.3.7 Magnetic rod antenna, for example ferrite. | | |||| | | If there is no risk of confusion, the general antenna symbol may be omitted. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.4 Attenuator 2.4.1 Fixed attenuator F 2.4.4 Variable attenuator ; pad (general) F (general) 267 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 2.6.1 Add: 2.6.1.1 Magnetostrictive delay line shown with one input and two outputs giving delays of 50 µs and 100 µs 2.6.1.2 Coaxial delay line 2.6.1.3 Mercury delay line with piezoelectric transducers 2.6.1.4 Delay line comprising an artificial line 2.6.4 Slow-wave structure *See NOTE 2.6.1A Add: 2.6.4.1 Open slow-wave structure (arrow indicates direction of energy flow) 268 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 2.6.4.2 Single electrode for electrostatic focusing along open slow-wave structure 2.6.4.3 Closed slow-wave structure, shown with envelope 2.6.5 Delay Line Circuits 2.6.5.1 Magnetostrictive delay line with windings; three windings shown in assembled representation NOTE — 2.6.5.1A: The winding symbols may be oriented as required 2.6.5.2 Magnetostrictive delay line with windings; one input and two outputs shown in detached representation Intermediate output with 50 µs delay Final output with 100 µs delay 269 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 2.6.5.3 Coaxial delay line -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.6.5.4 Solid material delay line with piezoelectric transducers 2.9.6 4 Stereo Add: 2.9.6.1 Stylus-operated stereo-phonic head 2.9.7 Light sensitive reproducing (reading, playback) head, monophonic 2.10 Piezoelectric Crystal Unit (including Crystal Unit, Quartz F ) Add: 2.10.1 Piezoelectric crystal with three electrodes 270 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 2.10.2 Piezoelectric crystal with two pairs of electrodes Add: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.17.1 Ignition unit, high energy | | |||| | | Add: || ||| || || 2.18 Ideal Circuit Elements -- 2.18.1 Ideal current source 2.18.2 Ideal voltage source 2.18.3 Ideal gyrator 271 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 2.19 Faults 2.19.1 Fault (indication of assumed fault location) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 2.19.2 Flashover Breakthrough After 3.1.2.3 Add: 3.1.2.4 Flexible conductor 3.1.6 Junction of paths or conductors After 3.1.6.3 Add: 3.1.6.3A Connection common to a group of similar items The total number of similar items may be indicated by a figure near the common connection symbol. 3.1.6.3A.1 EXAMPLE: Multiple uniselector banks show for 10 banks 272 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 After 3.1.6.5 Add: | | |||| | | -- || ||| || || 3.1.6.6.1 EXAMPLE: Synchronous generator, three-phase; both leads of each phase brought out, shown with external neutral point |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.1.6.6 Neutral point in multiphase system, shown in single-line representation 3.1.7.2 Twisted (shown with two twisted conductors) NOTE — 3.1.7.2A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always replace the asterisk by one of the following letters: P T = Pair = Triple 273 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 3.1.8.6 Add: 3.1.8.7 Interchange of conductors; change of phase sequence or inversion of polarity, shown for n conductors in single-line representation. -|| ||| || || The interchanged conductors may be indicated. | | |||| | | For the identification of the conductors, IEC Publication 445 (1973) [11] applies. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.1.8.7.1 EXAMPLE: Change of phase sequence After 3.2.6.2 Add: 3.2.7 Duct or pipe NOTE — 3.2.7A: The number of ducts, the crosse-section dimensions or other prticulars, such as duct occupancy, may be shown above the line representing the duct route. 3.2.7.1 EXAMPLE: Line of six-way duct 3.2.8 Line with manhole, giving access to jointing chamber 274 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 3.2.9 Straight-through joint box, shown with three conductors: Multiline representation 3.2.9.1 Single-line representation -|| ||| || || 3.2.10 Junction box, shown with three conductors with T-connections: | | |||| | | Multiline representation |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.2.10.1 Single-line representation 3.2.11 Line with buried jointing point 3.2.12 Line with gas or oil block 3.2.13 Line with gas or oil stop valve 275 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 3.2.14 Line with gas or oil block bypass 3.2.15 Power feeding 3.2.15.1 Power feeding (ac) on telecommunication lines 3.2.15.2 Power feeding (dc) on telecommunication lines 3.2.16 Anticreepage device Anticreepage device for cable -- NOTE — 3.2.16A: The symbol should be shown on the creepout side of the manhole. || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 3.2.16.1 EXAMPLE: Manhole equipped with anticreepage device for cable (Creepage to the left is prevented) 3.2.17 Overground, weatherproof enclosure, general symbol NOTE — 3.2.17A: Qualifying symbols or designations may be used to indicate the apparatus contained in the enclosure. 3.2.17.1 EXAMPLE: Amplifying point in a weatherproof enclosure 276 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 3.2.18 Crossconnection point NOTE — 3.2.18A: Inlets and outlets may be oriented as required. 3.2.19 Line concentrator Automatic line connector 3.2.19.1 EXAMPLE: Line concentrator on a pole 3.2.20 Protective anode NOTE — 3.2.20A: The type of anode material may be indicated by adding its chemical letter symbol. 3.2.20.1 EXAMPLE: Magnesium protective anode After 3.6.7 Add: 3.6.8 Optical fiber 277 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 3.10 Add: 3.10.1 Pressure-tight bulkhead cable gland; shown with three cables NOTE — 3.10.1A: The high-pressure side is the longer side of the trapezoid thus retaining gland in bulkhead. 4. Graphics Symbols for Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays 4.1 Switching Function NOTE — 4.1A: Switching function symbols are suitable for use on detached contact diagrams, but may be used in other applications. Add: 4.1A Qualifying Symbols for Contacts (IEC Publication 617-7 (1983) [18]) 4.1A.1 Contactor functions 4.1A.2 Circuit-breaker function 4.1A.3 Disconnector (isolator) function 4.1A.4 Switch-disconnector (isolating-switch) function 4.1A.5 Automatic release function 278 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 4.1A.6 Position switch function Limit switch function NOTES: 4.1A.6A — This qualifying symbol can be applied to simple contact symbols to indicate position or limit switches if there is no need to show the means of operating the contact. In complicated cases, where it is desirable to show the means of operation, symbols 14.4.16 to 14.4.16.3 should be used instead. 4.1A.6B — This symbol is placed on both sides of the contact symbol when the contact is mechanically operated in both directions. 4.1A.7 Spring return function NOTES: 4.1A.7A — This symbol may be used to indicate spring return function. When this convention is invoked its use should be appropriately referenced. 4.1A.7B — This symbol should not be used together with qualifying symbols 4.1A.1, 4.1A.2, 4.1A.3, and 4.1A.4. In many cases, symbol 14.5.1 may be used. 4.1A.8 Nonspring return (stay put) function 4.1A.8A — This symbol may be used to indicate nonspring return function. When this convention is invoked, its use should be appropriately referenced. 4.3 Basic Contact Assemblies The standard method of showing a contact is by a symbol indicating the circuit condition it produces when the actuating device is in the de-energized or nonoperated position. The actuating device may be of a mechanical, electrical, or other nature, and a clarifying note may be necessary with the symbol to explain the proper point at which the contact functions; for example, the point where a contact closes or opens as a function of changing pressure, level, flow, voltage, current, etc. In cases where it is desirable to show contacts in the energized or operated condition and where confusion may result, a clarifying note shall be added to the drawing. For designations of auxiliary switches or contacts for circuit breakers, etc, see ANSI/IEEE C37.2-1979 [3]. 279 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.1A.8B — This symbol should not be used together with qualifying symbols 4.1A.1, 4.1A.2, 4.1A.3, and 4.1A.4. In many cases, symbol 14.5.2 may be used. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTES: IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Add: 4.3A IEC Publication 617-7 (1983) [18] Coordinated System This section provides preferred symbols for contact units and switchgear. Each symbol depicts the function of a contact or a switching device, without necessarily being related to the construction of the device it represents. A small circle, open or filled in, representing the hinge-point may be added to most of the symbols for contacts, switches, and controlgear. See for example 4.3A.1.1.1. For clarity this symbol must be shown on some symbols, see for example 4.3A.1.4. 4.3A.1 Contacts with two or three positions |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.3A.1.1 Make contact || ||| || || | | |||| | | NOTE — 4.3A.1.1A: This symbol is also used as the general symbol for a switch. -- 4.3A.1.1.1 4.3A.1.2 Break contact 4.3A.1.3 Change-over break before make contact 280 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 4.3A.1.4 Two-way contact with center-off position 4.3A.1.5 Changeover make before break contact (bridging) 4.3A.1.5.1 4.3A.1.6 Contact with two makes 4.3A.1.7 Contact with two breaks 4.3A.2 Passing contacts with two positions 281 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.3A.2.1 Passing make contact closing momentarily when its operating device is actuated. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.3A.2.2 Passing make contact closing momentarily when its operating device is released 4.3A.2.3 Passing make contact closing momentarily when its operating device is actuated or released 4.3A.3 Early and late operating contacts 4.3A.3.1 Make contact (of a multiple contact assembly) which is early to close relative to the other contacts of the assembly 4.3A.3.2 Make contact (of a multiple contact assembly) which is late to close relative to the other contacts of the assembly 4.3A.3.3 Break contact (of a multiple contact assembly) which is late to open relative to the other contacts of the assembly 4.3A.3.4 Break contact (of a multiple contact assembly) which is early to open relative to the other contacts of the assembly 282 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 4.3A.4 Examples of contacts with intentional delay |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.3A.4.1 Make contact delayed when closing (operating device actuated) || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.3A.4.2 -- 4.3A.4.3 Break contact delayed when reclosing (operating device released) 4.3A.4.4 4.3A.4.5 Make contact delayed when closing and opening 4.3A.4.6 Contact assembly with one make contact not delayed, one make contact delayed when reopening and one break contact delayed when opening 283 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.3A.5 Examples of spring return and nonspring return (stay put) contacts 4.3A.5.1 Make contact with spring return 4.3A.5.2 Make contact without spring return (stay put) 4.3A.5.3 Break contact with spring return 4.3A.5.4 Two-way contact with center-off position with spring return from the left-hand position but not from the right-hand one (stay put) Add: 4.3B ANSI/IEEE Std 315-1975 [7] System 4.3.1 Closed contact (break) . . . No change in existing symbols but IEC approval will be withdrawn in the future. . . 4.3.8.3 Add: 4.6.3 Indication of operating method Former 4.6.3 is now 4.6.3.5 284 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 -|| ||| || || Devices with push or pull operation normally have spring return. It is therefore not necessary to show the automatic return symbol (14.5.1). On the other hand, a detent symbol (14.5.2) should be shown in the exceptional cases where locking exists. | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Devices operated by turning do not usually have automatic return. It is therefore not necessary for the detent symbol (14.5.2) to be shown. On the other hand, the automatic return symbol (14.5.1) should be shown in those cases where an automatic return exists. 4.6.3.1 Manually operated switch; general symbol 4.6.3.2 Push-button switch (nonlocking) 4.6.3.3 Pull-switch (nonlocking) 4.6.3.4 Turn-switch (locking) 4.6.3.5 Knife switch F , general 285 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.14.5.3 Normally closed After 4.14.5.4 || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.14.5.5 Position or limit switch mechanically operated in both directions with two separate circuits |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Add: -- 4.21.1 Closes on rising temperature 4.21.2 Opens on rising temperature 286 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 4.22 Flasher Self-Interrupting Switch Add: 4.22.1 Self-operating thermal switch, break contact |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTE — 4.22.1A: It is important to distinguish between a contact as shown and a contact of a thermal relay, which in detached representation may be shown as follows: -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.22.2 Gas discharge tube with thermal element Starter for fluorescent lamp Revise 4.29.1 to read as follows: 4.29.1 Manually operated 3-pole contactor 287 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 4.33 Add: 4.34 Multipole and Multiposition Switches (IEC Publication 617-7 (1983) [18] 4.34.1 Key operated lever or turn switches (compare with 4.12 items) -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.34.1.1 Three position lever-operated switch, locking in the upper position and with spring return from the lower position to the middle one, shown with terminals 4.34.1.2 Button-operated switch in which one set of contacts is operated by pushing the button (nonlocking) and another set by turning it (locking), shown with terminals The bracket indicates that there is only one actuator 288 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 4.34.1.3 Button-operated switch in which the same set of contacts may be operated in two different ways; either by turning (with locking) or pushing (with spring return), shown with terminals 4.34.2 Multiposition Switches 4.34.2.1 Single-pole n-position switch, shown for n = 6 4.34.2.2 Single-pole n-position switch, alternative for use when n is small, shown for n = 4 -|| ||| || || 4.34.2.3 Example with position diagram | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTE — 4.34.2.3A: It is sometimes convenient to indicate the purpose of each switch position by adding text to the position diagram. It is also possible to indicate limitations of movement of the operating device as in the examples which follow: 289 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR The operating device (for example handwheel) can be turned only from positions 1 to 4 and back. The operating device can be turned in the clockwise direction only. The operating device can be turned in the clockwise direction without limitation and may be turned in the counter-clockwise direction only between positions 3 and 1. 4.34.2.4 Four-position switch, manually operated, having four independent circuits -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.34.2.5 Single-pole, four-position switch in which position 2 cannot be connected 290 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.34.2.6 Single-pole, six-position switch with a wiper that bridges only while passing from one position to the next -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.34.2.7 Single-pole multiposition switch with a wiper that bridges three consecutive terminals in each switch position 4.34.2.8 Single-pole multiposition switch with a wiper that bridges four terminals but omits one intermediate terminal in each switch position 4.34.2.9 Single-pole multiposition switch for cumulative parallel switching 4.34.2.10 One pole of a six-position multipole switch The pole shown makes earlier than the other poles when the wiper moves from position 2 to 3 and breaks later than the other poles when the wiper moves from position 5 to 6. When the wiper moves in the opposite direction the early make becomes a later break and vice versa. 291 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.34.3 Block Symbols for Complex Switches There are many ways in which complex switching functions can be achieved mechanically, for example by rotary wafer switches, slide switches, drum controllers, cam-operated contact assemblies, etc. There are also many ways in which the switching functions may be symbolized on circuit diagrams. Study has shown that there is no unique system of symbolization which is superior in every application. The system employed should be chosen with due regard to the purpose of the diagram and the degree of complexity of the switching device it is desired to symbolize. This section therefore presents one possible method of symbolizing complex switches. To facilitate understanding each example includes a contructional drawing of the device symbolized. The method shown here uses a general symbol for a complex switch which must be supplemented by a table of connections. Two examples are shown. 4.34.3.1 Complex switch, general symbol 4.34.3.2 EXAMPLE: 18-position rotary wafer switch with six terminals, here designated A to F, contructed as shown in the bottom diagram (switch shown in position 1) 292 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 Table of connections 4.34.3.3 EXAMPLE: Six-position rotary drum switch with five terminals, constructed as shown in the bottom diagram 293 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR The symbols + - and O indicate the terminals that are connected together at any position (rest-position or intermediate position) of the switch, that is, terminals having the same indicating symbol for example, + are interconnected 294 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTE — 4.34.3.3A: Where additional symbols are required, the characters available on a typewriter should be used, for example, x, =. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 4.35 Switchgear and Controlgear 4.35.1 Switch (mechanical) 4.35.2 Contactor (contact open in the unoperated position) 4.35.3 Contactor with automatic release |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.35.4 Contactor (contact closed in the unoperated position) -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.35.5 Circuit breaker 295 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.35.6 Disconnector (isolator) 4.35.7 Two-way disonnector (isolator) with center-off position 4.35.8 Switch-disconnector (on-load isolating switch) 4.35.9 Switch-disconnector with automatic release | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.35.10 Disconnector (isolator) with blocking device, manually operated || ||| || || 4.36 Block Symbols for Motor Starters -- 4.36.1 Motor starter, general symbol NOTE — 4.36.1A: Qualifying symbols may be shown inside the general symbol to indicate particular types of starters. See symbols 4.36.5, 4.36.7, and 4.36.8. 296 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 4.36.2 Starter operated in steps NOTE — 4.36.2A: The number of steps may be indicated. 4.36.3 Starter-regulator -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 4.36.4 Starter with automatic release |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.36.5 Direct on line contactor starter for reversing motor Full voltage contactor starter for reversing motor 4.36.6 Star-delta starter 4.36.7 Autotransformer starter 297 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.36.8 Starter-regulator with thyristors 4.37 Operating Devices for Electromechanical (all or nothing) Relays | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.37.1 Operating device, general symbol NOTE — 4.37.2A: Operating devices with several windings may be indicated by inclusion of the appropriate number of inclined strokes or by repeating symbol 4.37.1 or 4.37.2. 4.37.3 EXAMPLES: Operating device with two separate windings assembled representation 4.37.4 298 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- || ||| || || 4.37.2 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 4.37.5 Operating device with two separate windings, detached representation 4.37.6 -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 4.37.7 Relay coil of a slow-releasing relay 4.37.8 Relay coil of a slow-operating relay 4.37.9 Relay coil of a slow-operating and slow-releasing relay 4.37.10 Relay coil of a high-speed relay (fast operating and fast releasing) 299 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 4.37.11 Relay coil of a relay unaffected by alternating current 4.37.12 Relay coil of an alternating current relay 4.37.13 Relay coil of a mechanically resonant relay 4.37.14 Relay coil of a mechanically latched relay -|| ||| || || 4.37.15 Relay coil of a polarized relay | | |||| | | NOTE — 4.37.15A: Dots may be used to indicate the relationship between the direction of the current through the winding of a polarized relay and the movement of the contact arm. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- When the winding terminal identified by the polarity dot is positive with respect to the other winding terminals, the contact arm moves or tends to move towards the position marked with the dot. 4.37.16 EXAMPLES: Polarized relay, self restoring, operating for only one direction of current in the winding 300 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 4.37.17 Polarized relay with neutral position, self restoring, operating for either direction of current in the winding 4.37.18 Polarized relay with two stable positions 4.37.19 Relay coil of a remanent relay 4.37.20 5. Graphic Symbols for Terminals and Connectors 5.3 Connector Disconnecting Device Jack F Plug F The contact symbol is not an arrowhead. It is larger and the lines are drawn at a 90° angle. 5.3.1 Female contact 301 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 5.3.2 Male contact Revise 5.3.4.1 to read as follows: 5.3.4.1 Application: engaged 4-conductors (male plug - female receptacle shown) || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 5.3.5.1 2-conductor (jack) 302 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- 5.3.5.2 2-conductor (plug) Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 5.3.5.3 35 3-conductor (jack) with 2 break contacts (normals) and 1 auxiliary make contact -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 5.3.5.4 3-conductor (plug) 5.3.5.5 Break or isolating jack, telephone type After 5.3.6.4 Add: 5.3.7 Adapter 5.7.3.1 Plug and socket-type connector, for example U-link: male-male 5.3.7.2 Male-female 35 The broken line - — - indicates where line connection to a symbol is made and is not part of the symbol. 303 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 5.3.7.3 Male-male with socket access 5.3.8 Butt-connector 5.3.9 Connecting link, closed 5.3.9.1 5.3.9.2 Connecting link, open After 5.6.1 Add: 5.6.1A Coaxial plug and socket NOTE — 5.6.1A: If the coaxial plug or socket is connected to a coaxial pair, the tangential line(s) should be appropriately extended. 6. Graphic Symbols for Transformers, Inductors, and Windings 6.1.2 Magnetic core of inductor or transformer Not to be used unless it is necessary to identify a magnetic core. 304 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 Revise 6.2.1 to read as follows: 6.2.1 General NOTE — 6.2.1A: This symbol is deprecated and should not be used on a new schematics. Add: 6.2.1A Choke Reactor 6.2.2 Magnetic-core inductor Telephone loading coil -- If necessary to show a magnetic core. || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.2.2.1 Inductor with gap in magnetic core Add: 6.2.4.1 Inductor with moving contact, variable in steps 305 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 6.2.5 Add: 6.2.5A Variometer 6.2.9 See new 11.3.3 After 6.2.9 Add: 6.2.10 Coaxial choke with magnetic core 6.2.11 Ferrite bead, shown on a conductor -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | Revise NOTE 6.4.1A to read as follows: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTE — 6.4.1A: This symbol is the preferred single-line symbol in IEC Publication 617-6 (1983) [17]. It should be used on schematics for equipments having international usage, especially when the equipment will be marked using this symbol (in accordance with IEC Publication 417 (1973) [10]. 6.4.2.3 Application: transformer with magnetic core shown and with an electrostatic shield between windings. The shield is shown connected to the frame. 306 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 Add: 6.4.2.3A Single-phase transformer with two windings and screen. Revise 6.4.4 to read as follows: -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.4.4 One winding with adjustable inductance NOTE — 6.4.4A: The former right-hand diagrams. symbol has been deleted. It is no longer recommended for use on complete 6.4.6 Adjustable mutual inductor; constant-current transformer 307 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.4.7 With taps, 1-phase Add: 6.4.7A Transformer with center tapping on one winding Revise 6.4.8 to read as follows: 6.4.8 Autotransformer, 1-phase -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 308 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.4.8A Autotransformer, three-phase, star connection | | |||| | | Revise 6.4.9 to read as follows: -- || ||| || || 6.4.9 Adjustable Revise 6.4.12 to read as follows: 6.4.12 1-phase induction voltage regulator(s) Number of regulators may be written adjacent to the symbol. 309 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Revise 6.4.14 to read as follows: 6.4.14 3-phase induction voltage regulator -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 310 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 Revise 6.4.15 to read as follows: 6.4.15 1-phase, 2-winding transformer -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | Revise 6.4.15.1 to read as follows: 6.4.15.1 Application: 3-phase bank of 1-phase, 2 winding transformers with wye-delta connections |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- The alternate symbol has been corrected to conform to IEC Publication 617-6 (1983) [17]. Shown outside the symbol is Y. Reason: Three separate transformers. 311 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Revise 6.4.15.2 to read as follows: 6.4.15.2 Three-phase transformer with 4 taps with wye-wye connections 6.4.16 Polyphase transformer 312 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 6.4.16A.1 Three-phase transformer, connection star-delta 6.4.16A.2 See 6.4.15.2 6.4.16A.3 Three-phase transformer with on-load tap changer, connection star-delta 6.4.16A.4 Three-phase transformer, connection star-zigzag 313 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.4.16A.5 Three-phase transformer, connection star-star-delta Revise 6.4.17 to read as follows: 6.4.17 1-phase, 3-winding transformer 6.4.18 Current transformer(s) Avoid conflict with symbol 3.2.5 if used on the same diagram. 314 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 -|| ||| || || 6.4.18.1 Current transformer with two cores and two secondary windings | | |||| | | The terminal symbols shown at each end of the primary circuit indicate that only a single device is represented. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTE — 6.4.18.1A: In the right-hand symbol core symbols my be omitted. 6.4.18.2 Current transformer with two secondary windings on one core. NOTE — 6.4.18.2A: In the right-hand symbol the core symbol shall be drawn. 315 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.4.18.3 Current transformer with one secondary winding with three tappings -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.4.18.4 Current transformer where the primary conductor forms five winding turns 6.4.18.5 Pulse or current transformer with one permanent winding and three threaded windings 6.4.18.6 Pulse or current transformer with two permanent windings on the same core and with nine threaded windings 316 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 6.4.20 Potential transformer(s) -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- After 6.5 Add: 6.6 Ferrite Cores—Symbol Elements (IEC Publication 617-4 (1983) [15]) 6.6.1 Ferrite core 6.6.2 Flux/current direction indicator This symbol indicates that a horizontal line drawn at a right angle through a core symbol represents a core winding, and it also gives the relative directions of current and flux. NOTE — 6.6.2A: This symbol is not applicable for topographical representation. 317 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 6.6.3 Ferrite core with one winding The oblique line may be regarded as a reflector that relates the directions of current and flux as shown below. For drawing convenience, lines representing conductors are often shown crossing core symbols even though there is no winding on the magnetic circuit. Except in topographical representation the use of the oblique stroke is mandatory in all cases where a line through the core symbol represents a winding. EXAMPLE: -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.7 Ferrite Cores (IEC Publication 617-4 (1983) [15]) 6.7.1 Ferrite core with five windings NOTE — 6.7.1A: Information on the direction of current, its relative amplitude and the logic conditions imposed by the state of the magnetic remanence may be added. 318 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 6.7.2 Ferrite core with one winding of m turns 6.8 Magnetic Storage Matrices (Topographical Representation) 6.8.1 Ferrite core matrix with x and y windings and a readout winding. The symbol of a ferrite core, 6.6.1, is shown at 45° to the horizontal. || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 6.8.2 Matrix arrangement comprising thin sheet magnetic stores, located between thin sheet wiring layers. 7. Graphic Symbols for Electron Tubes and Related Devices -- 7.1.1.1 Directly heated (filamentary) cathode NOTE — 7.1.1.1A: Leads may be connected in any convenient manner to ends of the ∧ provided the identity of the ∧ is retained. 319 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 7.1.1.2 Indirectly heated cathode Lead may be connected to either extreme end of the or, if required, to both ends, in any convenient manner. After 7.1.1.6 Add: 7.1.1.7 Photoemissive electrode 7.1.2.1 Grid IEC Beam-confining or beam-forming electrodes -|| ||| || || Add: | | |||| | | 7.1.2.1.1 Grid with secondary emission |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 320 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 -|| ||| || || Revise 7.1.2.2 to read as follows: | | |||| | | 7.1.2.2 Deflecting electrodes (used in pairs) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.1.2.2A Radial deflecting electrodes, one pair of electrodes shown After 7.1.2.4 Add: 7.1.2.5 Ion diffusion barrier 7.1.2.6 Intensity modulating electrode NOTE — 7.1.2.6A: Symbol 7.1.2.1 may be used if no confusion will arise: 7.1.2.7 Focusing electrode with aperture Beam-forming plate 7.1.2.8 Beam-splitting electrode internally connected to the final focusing electrode of the electron gun 7.1.2.9 Cylindrical focusing electrode Drift space electrode Electronic lens element 321 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 7.1.2.10 Cylindrical focusing electrode with grid 7.1.2.11 Multiaperture electrode 7.1.2.12 Quantizing electrode Sampling electrode -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.1.5 Heater After 7.1.8 Add: 7.1.9 Storage electrodes 7.1.9.1 Storage electrode 322 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 7.1.9.2 Photoemissive storage electrode 7.1.9.3 Storage electrode with secondary emission in the direction of the arrow 7.1.9.4 Photoconductive storage electrode 7.1.10 Symbol elements for microwave tubes 7.1.10.1 Electron gun assembly, shown with envelope 7.1.10.2 Reflector Repelling electrode (used in velocity modulated tubes) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.1.10.3 Nonemitting sole for open slow-wave structure -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 7.1.10.4 Nonemitting sole for closed slow-wave structure 323 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 7.1.10.5 Emitting sole (arrow indicates direction of electron flow) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.3.6.1 With electric-field (electrostatic) deflection Add: -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 7.3.6.1.1 Double-beam cathode-ray tube, split-beam type with: Electrostatic deflection Indirectly heated cathode Add: 7.3.6.2.3 Cathode-ray tube with electromagnetic deviation, with:    Permanent magnet focusing and ion trap Intensity modulating electrode Indirectly heated cathode For example, television picture tube 324 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 7.4 Solion Ion-Diffusion Device 7.4.1 Diode solion 7.4.2 Tetrode solion NOTE — 7.4.2A: Letters in parentheses are not part of the symbol. I S R C Input Shield Readout Common 325 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 7.5 Coulomb Accumulator Electrochemical Step-Function Device NOTE — 7.5A: Letters in parentheses are not part of the symbol, but are for explanation only. For a precharged cell, with + polarity applied to P, the cell internal resistance and voltage drop will remain low until the designed coulomb quantity has passed; then the internal resistance will rise to its high value. 326 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 Revise 7.7.1 to read as follows: 7.7.1 General Revise 7.7.2 to read as follows: 7.7.2 Application: metal enclosure, having one collector connected to the enclosure After 7.7.2 Add: 7.7.3 Ionizing radiation detectors 7.7.3.1 Ionization chamber -- 7.7.3.2 Ionization chamber with grid || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 327 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 7.7.3.3 Ionization chamber with guard ring |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 7.7.3.4 Ionization chamber, compensated type -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 7.7.3.5 Faraday cup 7.7.3.6 Counter tube 7.7.3.7 Counter tube with guard ring 8. Graphic Symbols for Semiconductor Devices Revise 8.2.2 to read as follows: 8.2.2 Rectifying junction or junction which influences a depletion layer Arrowheads ( ) shall be half the length of the arrow away from the semiconductor base region. 328 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 See item 8.6 The equilateral ( ) triangle shall be filled and shall touch the semiconductor base-region symbol. NOTE — 8.2.2A: The triangle points in the direction of the forward (easy) current as indicated by a direct-current ammeter, unless otherwise noted adjacent to the symbol. Electron flow is in the opposite direction. Add: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.2.2A Rectifying junction | | |||| | | Revise: -- || ||| || || 8.2.2.1 P region on N region Revise: 8.2.2.2 N region on P region 329 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.2.3 Enhancement-type semiconductor region with plurality of ohmic connections and a rectifying junction Portions of the interrupted channel line having ohmic contacts shall be of equal length and drawn significantly longer than the center-channel section. Channel gaps shall be of equal length and approximately equal to the center-channel length. Add: 8.2.3A Indication of the conductivity type of the channel for insulated gate field effect transistors (IGFET) -|| ||| || || 8.2.3A.1 N-type channel on P-type substrate, shown for a depletion type IGFET | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.2.3A.2 P-type channel on an N-type substrate, shown for an enhancement type IGFET 8.2.4.1 P emitter on N region 8.2.4.1.1 Plurality of P emitters on N region 330 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 8.2.4.2 N emitter on P region 8.2.4.2.1 Plurality of N emitters on P region -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- CORRECTION: Symbol was omitted in some printings. 8.2.9.2 Gate (no external connection) For application, see symbol 8.5.9 Because there is no external connection to the gate, this lead shall not extend to the envelope symbol, if any. 8.3.1 Breakdown Do not rotate or show in mirror-image form. 331 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Add: 8.3.1A Bidirectional breakdown effect 8.3.3 Backward After 8.3.4 Add: 8.3.5 Schottky effect 8.5.1 Semiconductor diode; semiconductor rectifier diode; metallic rectifier 332 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 8.5.2 Capacitive diode (varactor) 8.5.3 Temperature-dependent diode -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 8.5.4.1 Photosensitive type |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.5.4.2 Photoemissive type See also item 11.1.1 333 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.5.6.1 Unidirectional diode; voltage regulator 8.5.6.2 Bidirectional diode 8.5.7 Tunnel and backward diodes 8.5.7.1 Tunnel diode For this application, NOTE 8.2.2A does not apply. 334 -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.5.7.2 Backward diode; tunnel rectifier For this application, NOTE 8.2.2A does not apply. 335 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.5.8 Thyristor, reverse-blocking diode-type 8.5.8.1 General After 8.5.8.2 Add: 8.5.8.3 Reverse conducting diode thyristor 8.5.9 Thyristor, bidirectional diode type; bi-switch See also symbol 8.6.15 -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Add: 8.5.11 Current regulator 336 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 8.6 Typical Applications, Three- (or more) Terminal Devices 8.6.1 PNP transistor (also PNIP transistor, if omitting the intrinsic region will not result in ambiguity) NOTE — 8.6.1A: See ANSI/IEEE Std 315-1975 [7], paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction. 8.6.2 NPN transistor (also NPIN transistor, if omitting the intrinsic region will not result in ambiguity) See NOTE 8.6.1A Add: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.6.2A NPN transistor with collector connected to the envelope | | |||| | | After 8.6.2.1 || ||| || || Add: -- 8.6.2.2 NPN avalanche transistor 337 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.6.3 NPN transistor with transverse-biased base See NOTE 8.6.1A 8.6.4 PNIP transistor with ohmic connection to the intrinsic region See NOTE 8.6.1A 8.6.6 PNIN transistor with ohmic connection to the intrinsic region See NOTE 8.6.1A 8.6.8 Unijunction transistor with N-type base See NOTE 8.6.1A 338 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 8.6.9 Unijunction transistor with P-type base | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- See NOTE 8.6.1A || ||| || || 8.6.10 Field-effect transistor with N-channel (junction gate and insulated gate) -- 8.6.10.1 N-channel junction gate If desired, the junction-gate symbol element may be drawn opposite the preferred source. See NOTE 8.6.1A 339 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.6.10.2 N-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, passive-bulk (substrate), three-terminal device -- 8.6.10.2A IGFET enhancement-type, single-gate, N-type channel without substrate connection || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.3.10.3 N-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk (substrate) internally terminated to source, three-terminal device Add: 8.6.10.3A IGFET enhancement-type, single-gate, N-type channel with substrate internally connected to source 8.6.10.4 N-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk (substrate) externally terminated, fourterminal device 340 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 -|| ||| || || 8.6.10.4.1 Application: N-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, two-gate, five-terminal device | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.6.11 Field-effect transistor with P-channel (junction gate and insulated gate) 8.6.11.1 P-channel junction gate See NOTE 8.6.1A 8.6.11.2 P-channel insulated-gate, depletion-type, single-gate, passive-bulk (substrate), three-terminal device 8.6.11.2A Insulated-gate field-effect transistor (abridged IGFET) enhancement type, single gate. P-type channel without substrate connection NOTE — 8.6.11.2A: For an example with multiple gates, see symbol 8.6.10.4.1. 341 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.6.11.5 P-channel insulated-gate, enhancement-type, single-gate, active-bulk (substrate) externally terminated, fourterminal device 8.6.12.1 General -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.6.12.2 Gate turn-off type 342 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 8.6.13.1 General -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 8.6.13.2 Gate turn-off type 8.6.14 Thyristor, reverse-blocking tetrode-type; semiconductor controlled switch 8.6.15 Thyristor, bidirectional triode-type; triac; gated switch See also symbol 8.5.9 343 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 8.6.16 Phototransistor (PNP-type) -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- See also symbol 8.5.10, for 2-terminal device After 8.10.4 Add: 8.10.5 Optical coupling device Opto isolator Shown with light emitting diode and phototransistor 8.10.6 Magnetic coupling device Magnetic isolator 344 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 After 8.11.2 Add: 8.12 Ionizing Radiation Detectors 8.12.1 Detector, semiconductor type 8.12.2 Scintillator detector 8.12.3 Cerenkov detector -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 8.12.4 Thermoluminescence detector |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 345 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 9. Graphic Symbols for Circuit Protectors 9.1 Fuse (one-time thermal current-overload device) 9.1.1 General Add: | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.1.1A Fuse with mechanical linkage (striker fuse) || ||| || || Revise: -- 9.1.2 Fuse with alarm contact NOTE — 9.1.2A: When fuse blows, alarm bus A is connected to power supply bus S. The letters S (supply), L (load), and A (alarm circuit) are for explanation only, and are not part of the symbol. 346 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 Add: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.1.2.1 Fuse with alarm contact, three terminals || ||| || || | | |||| | | 9.1.2.2 Fuse with separate alarm circuit -- Add: 9.1.3.1 Fuse-switch 9.3 Lightning Arrester F Arrester (electric surge, etc) Gap See also symbol 8.5.6 9.3.1 General 347 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 9.3.1.1 Double spark-gap After 9.3.9 Add: 9.3.10 Surge arrester (Lightning arrester) 9.3.11 Protective gas discharge tube 9.3.12 Symmetric protective gas discharge tube -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Revise 9.4 to read as follows: 9.4 Circuit Breaker F If it is desired to show the condition causing the breaker to trip, the relay protective-function symbols in item 9.5.1 may be used alongside the breaker symbol. 9.4.1 General 348 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.4.2 Air circuit breaker, if distinction is needed; for alternating-current circuit breakers rated at 1500 volts or less and for all direct-current circuit breakers. -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 9.4.3 Network protector 9.4.4 Circuit breaker, other than covered by symbol 9.4.1 The symbol in the right column is for a 3-pole breaker. NOTE — 9.4.4A: On a power diagram, the symbol may be used without other identification. On a composite drawing where confusion with the general circuit element symbol (item 16.1) may result, add the identifying letters CB inside or adjacent to the square. 9.4.5 Application: 3-pole circuit breaker with thermal-overload device in all 3 poles 349 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 9.4.6 Application: 3-pole circuit breaker with magnetic-overload device in all 3 poles 9.4.7 Application: 3-pole circuit breaker, drawout type After 9.5.12.20 Add: 9.6 Protective Relays (IEC Publication 617-7 (1983 [18]) Block Symbol and Qualifying Symbol 9.6.1 Measuring relay or related device The asterisk must be replaced by one or more letters or qualifying symbols indicating the parameters of the device, in the following order; characteristic quantity and its mode of variation; direction of energy flow; setting range, resetting ratio; delayed action; value of time delay NOTE — 9.6.1A: Letter symbols for characteristic quantities should be in accordance with established standards, for example ISO 31 , 0-11 (1974-1980) [25], IEC Publication 27 [9], ANSI/IEEE Std 260-1978 [5], and ANSI/IEEE Std 280-1985 [6]. Symbols 9.6.2, 9.6.4, and 9.6.7 show how letter and qualifying symbols may be combined. NOTES: 9.6.1B — A figure giving the number of similar measuring elements may be included in the symbol as shown in example 9.7.5. 9.6.1C — The symbol may be used as a functional symbol representing the whole of the device, or as a symbol representing only the actuating element of the device. 9.6.2 Voltage failure to frame (frame potential in case of fault) NOTE — 9.6.2A: U may be replaced by V. 350 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 9.6.3 Residual voltage The NOTE with symbol 9.6.2 is applicable 9.6.4 Reverse current 9.6.5 Differential current 9.6.6 Percentage differential current 9.6.7 Earth fault current 9.6.8 Current in the neutral conductor 9.6.9 Current between neutrals of two polyphase systems 9.6.10 Power at phase angle a 9.6.11 Inverse time-lag characteristic 351 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 9.7 Examples of Protective Relays (IEC Publication 617-7 (1983) [18]) 9.7.1 No voltage relay 9.7.2 Reverse current relay 9.7.3 Underpower relay 9.7.4 Delayed overcurrent relay 9.7.5 Overcurrent relay with two current elements and a setting range from 5 A to 10 A 9.7.6 Maximum reactive power relay: Energy-flow towards the busbars Operating value 1 Mvar Time-lag adjustable from 5 s to 10 s 352 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||---    ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 9.7.7 Undervoltage relay:   Setting range from 50 V to 80 V Resetting ratio 130% 9.7.8 Current relay operating above 5 A and below 3 A 9.7.9 Under-impedance relay -|| ||| || || 9.7.10 Relay detecting interturn short-circuits | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 9.7.11 Divided-conductor detection relay 353 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 9.7.12 Phase-failure detection relay in a three-phase system 9.7.13 Locked-rotor detection relay operating by current sensing 9.7.14 Overcurrent relay with two outputs, one active at current above five times the setting value, the other with inverse time-lag characteristic 9.8 Other Relay Devices 9.8.1 Buchholz protective device (gas relay) 9.8.2 Auto-reclose device 354 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 10. Graphic Symbols for Acoustic Devices 10.1.2 Buzzer F Revise: 10.1.3.3 Loudspeaker-microphone IEC Underwater sound transducer, two-way After 10.1.4 Add: 10.1.5 Hydrophone (supersonic transmitter-receiver) 10.1.6 Horn 10.1.7 Siren 355 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 10.1.8 Whistle, electrically operated 11. Graphic Symbols for Lamps and Visual-Signaling Devices After NOTE 11.1.1C Add: 11.1.1A Lamp (IEC Publication 617-8 (1983) [19]) 11.1.1A.1 Lamp, general symbol Signal lamp, general symbol If it is desired to indicate the color, a notation according to the following code is placed adjacent to the symbol: RD YE GN BU WH = red = yellow = green = blue = white If it is desired to indicate the type of lamp, a notation according to the following code is placed adjacent to the symbol: Nc Xe Na Hg I IN EL ARC FL IR UV LED =neon = xenon = sodium vapor = mercury = iodine = incandescent = electroluminescent = arc = fluorescent = infrared = ultraviolet = light-emitting diode 356 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 11.1.1A.2 Signal lamp, flashing type After 11.2.8 Add: 11.3 Electromechanical Signal 11.3.1 Indicator, electromechanical Annunciator, element || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 11.3.2 Electromechanical position indicator with one de-energized (shown) and two operated positions -- 11.3.3 Coil operated flag indicator (Relocated from 6.2.9) 12. Graphic Symbols for Readout Devices 12.1 Meter Instrument Add: Note that IEC Publication 617-8 (1983) [19]   Distinguishes symbolwise between indicating, recording, and integrating instruments (see 12.3) Carefully follows the lettering style (uppercase, lowercase) specified for the SI system of measurement (see 12.4 through 12.6) NOTE — 12.1A: The asterisk is not part of the symbol. Always replace the asterisk by one of the following letter combinations, depending on the function of the meter or instrument, unless some other identification is provided in the circle and explained on the diagram. 357 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 12.1.1 Galvanometer F Avoid conflict with symbols 4.5 and 13.1.2 if used on the same diagram. 12.2 Electromagnetically Operated Counter Message Register See also 12.7 12.2.1 General 12.2.2 With make contact Add: 12.3 Indicating, Recording and Integrating Instruments, General Symbols (IEC Publication 617-8 (1983) [19] NOTE — 12.3A: The asterisk within the symbols of this section shall be replaced with one of the following:     The letter symbol for the unit of the quantity measured, or a multiple or sub-multiple thereof (see examples 12.4.1 and 12.4.7) The letter symbol for the quantity measured (see examples 12.4.5 and 12.4.6) A chemical formula (see example 12.4.13) A graphic symbol (see example 12.4.8) The symbol or formula used should be related to the information displayed by the instrument regardless of the means used to obtain the information. NOTE — 12.3B: Letter symbols for units and for quantities shall be selected from one of the parts of IEC Publication 27 [9], ANSI/IEEE Std 260-1978 [5], and ANSI/IEEE Std 280-1985 [6]. 358 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 Provided IEC Publication 27 [9], ANSI/IEEE Std 260-1978 [5], ANSI/IEEE Std 280-1985 [6], or the letter symbols for chemical elements, do not apply, other letter symbols may be used, if they are explained on the diagram or in referenced documents. NOTE — 12.3C: If the letter symbol for the unit of the quantity measured is used, it may be necessary to show the letter symbol for the quantity as supplementary information. It should be placed below the unit letter symbol (see example 12.4.2). Supplementary information concerning the quantity measured, and any necessary qualifying symbol may be shown below the quantity letter symbol. NOTE — 12.3D: If more than one quantity is indicated or recorded by an instrument, the appropriate symbol outlines shall be placed attached in line, horizontally or vertically (see examples 12.5.2 and 12.6.14). 12.3.1 Indicating instrument The asterisk shall be replaced in accordance with the rules given in NOTE 12.3A 12.3.2 Recording instrument The asterisk shall be replaced in accordance with the rules given in NOTE 12.3A 12.3.3 Integrating instrument Energy meter The asterisk shall be replaced in accordance with the rules given in NOTE 12.3A NOTES: 12.3.3A — The symbol may also be used for a remote instrument which repeats a reading transmitted from an integrating meter. For example, see symbol 12.6.11. 12.3.3B — The outline may be combined with that for a recording instrument to represent a combined instrument. For example, see symbol 12.6.14. 12.3.3C — Symbols from 1.7 may be used to specify the direction of energy flow. For examples, see symbols 12.6.4 to 12.6.7. 12.3.3D — The number of rectangles at the top of the symbol indicates the number of different summations by a multirate meter. For example, see symbol 12.4.8. 359 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR -|| ||| || || 12.4 Examples of Indicating Instruments (IEC Publication 617-8 (1983) [19]) | | |||| | | 12.4.1 Voltmeter |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 12.4.2 Reactive current ammeter 12.4.3 Maximum demand indicator actuated by an integrating meter 12.4.4 Varmeter 12.4.5 Power-factor meter 12.4.6 Phase meter 12.4.7 Frequency meter 360 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 -|| ||| || || 12.4.8 Synchronoscope | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 12.4.9 Wavemeter 12.4.10 Oscilloscope 12.4.11 Differential voltmeter 12.4.12 Galvanometer 12.4.13 Salinity meter 12.4.14 Thermometer Pyrometer NOTE — 12.4.14A: θ may be replaced by t°. 361 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 12.4.15 Tachometer -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 12.5 Examples of Recording Instruments (IEC Publication 617-8 (1983) [19] |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 12.5.1 Recording wattmeter 12.5.2 Combined recording wattmeter and varmeter 12.5.3 Oscillograph 12.6 Examples of Integrating Instruments (IEC Publication 617-8 (1983) [19]) 12.6.1 Hour meter 12.6.2 Ampere-hour meter 362 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 12.6.3 Watthour meter 12.6.4 Watthour meter, measuring energy transmitted in one direction only 12.6.5 Watthour meter, measuring the energy flow from the busbars 12.6.6 Watthour meter, measuring the energy flow towards the busbars -|| ||| || || 12.6.7 Import-export watthour meter | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 12.6.8 Multirate watthour meter, two-rate shown 363 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 12.6.9 Excess watthour meter |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 12.6.10 Watthour meter with transmitter -- 12.6.12 Remote meter (repeater) with printing device, actuated by a watthour meter || ||| || || | | |||| | | 12.6.11 Remote meter (repeater) actuated by a watthour meter 12.6.13 Watthour meter with maximum demand indicator 12.6.14 Watthour meter with maximum demand recorder 364 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 12.6.15 Varhour meter 12.7 Counting Devices (IEC Publication 617-8 (1983) [19]) 12.7.1 Counting function of a number of events, qualifying symbol 12.7.2 Pulse meter (electrically-operated counting device) | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 12.7.3 Pulse meter manually preset to n (reset if n-0) -- || ||| || || 12.7.4 Pulse meter electrically reset to 0 12.7.5 Pulse meter with multiple contacts Respective contacts close once at every unit (100), ten (101), hundred (102), thousand (103) events registered by the counter 365 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 12.7.6 Counting device, cam driven and closing a contact for each n events 12.8 Telemetering Devices 12.8.1 Signal translator, general symbol 12.8.2 Telemetering transmitter 12.8.3 Telemetering receiver 12.9 Electric Clocks 12.9.1 Clock, general symbol Secondary clock Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- 366 || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 12.9.2 Master clock COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 12.9.3 Clock with switch 13. Graphic Symbols for Rotating Machinery Add: 13.1.5A Brush (onslip-ring or commutator) NOTE — 13.1.5A: Brushes are shown only if necessary. Add: 13.1.7 Linear motor, general symbol 13.1.8 Stepping motor, general symbol Add: 13.5.1.1 Induction motor, three-phase, squirrel cage 367 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 13.5.1.2 Induction motor, single-phase, squirrel cage, leads of split phase brought out 13.5.1.3 Induction motor, three-phase, star-connected, with automatic starter in the rotor 13.5.1.4 Linear induction motor, three-phase, movement limited to one direction Add: 13.6.1.1 Synchronous generator, three-phase, permanent magnet 14. Graphic Symbols for Mechanical Functions 14.2 Mechanical Motion 14.2.1 Translation, one direction Add: 14.2.1A Rectilinear force or motion in the direction of the arrow 368 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 14.2.2 Translation, both directions Add: 14.2.2A Bidirectional rectilinear forces or motion |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- EXAMPLE: Frequency is increased when wiper 3 is moved towards terminal 2 | | |||| | | After 14.2.4 || ||| || || Add: -- 14.2.4A Bidirectional rotation, limited in both directions 14.2.4.1 Alternating or reciprocating For application see symbol 2.3.7.7 After 14.2.6 Add: 14.2.7 Delayed action 14.2.7.1 Delayed action NOTE — 14.2.7.1A: Delayed action in the direction of movement from the arc towards its center 369 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 14.2.7.2 Revise 14.3.3 to read as follows: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 14.3.3 Brake applied when operating means (not shown) is energized Revise 14.3.4 to read as follows: -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 14.3.4 Brake released when operating means (not shown) is energized Add: 14.3.5 Brake (IEC Publication 617 (1983) [13]) 14.3.5.1 EXAMPLE: Electric motor with brake applied. 14.3.5.2 EXAMPLE: Electric motor with brake released. 14.3.6 Gearing 370 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 After 14.4.2 Add: 14.4.2A Operating by pulling. Add: 14.4.4 Manually operated control with restricted access 14.4.5 Operated by turning 14.4.6 Operated by proximity effect 14.4.7 Operated by touching -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 14.4.8 Emergency switch (mushroom-head safety feature) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 14.4.9 Operated by handwheel 14.4.10 Operated by pedal 371 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 14.4.11 Operated by lever 14.4.12 Operated by removable handle 14.4.13 Operated by key 14.4.14 Operated by crank 14.4.15 Operated by roller 14.4.16 Operated by cam NOTE — 14.4.16A: If desired, a more detailed drawing of the cam may be shown. This applies also to a profile plate. 14.4.16.1 EXAMPLE: Cam profile |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 14.4.16.2 Profile plate Cam profile (developed representation) -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 14.4.16.3 Operated by cam and roller 372 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 14.4.17 Operated by stored mechanical energy NOTE — 14.4.17A: Information showing the form of stored energy may be added in the square. 14.4.18 Operated by pneumatic or hydraulic control, single acting 14.4.19 Operated by pneumatic or hydraulic control, double acting 14.4.20 Operated by electromagnetic actuator 14.4.21 Operated by electromagnetic overcurrent protection 14.4.22 Operated by thermal actuator, for example thermal relay, thermal overcurrent protection -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 14.4.23 Operated by electric motor 14.4.24 Operated by electric clock 373 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 14.5 Detents, Latching, and Blocking 14.5.1 Automatic return NOTE — 14.5.1A: The triangle is pointed in the return direction. 14.5.2 Detent Nonautomatic return Device for maintaining a given position 14.5.3 Detent, disengaged 14.5.4 Detent, engaged 14.5.5 Mechanical interlock between two devices 14.5.6 Latching device, disengaged 14.5.7 Latching device, engaged COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- 374 || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 14.5.8 Blocking device ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 14.5.9 Blocking device engaged, movement to the left is blocked 15. Graphic Symbols Commonly Used in Connection with VHF, UHF, and SHF Circuits 15.2 Coupling Commonly used in coaxial and waveguide diagrams. Add: 15.2A Coupler (or feed) type unspecified, general symbol 15.2A.1 EXAMPLE: Coupler to a cavity resonator 15.2A.2 EXAMPLE: Coupler to a rectangular waveguide -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | After 15.2.7 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Add: 15.2.8 Slow-wave coupler 15.2.9 Helical coupler 375 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 15.4.4.2 Add: 15.4.4.3 Quadrature hybrid junction After 15.5.3 Add: -- 15.5.4 Taper transition from circular rectangular waveguide || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.6 Mode Suppressor Commonly used in coaxial and waveguide transmission 15.6.1 General The asterisk shall be replaced by the indication of the mode suppressed 15.7 Rotary Joint (radio-frequency rotary coupler F ) Add: 15.7A Rotatable, with symmetrical connectors 15.8.4.1 Reversible direction Current entering the coil at the end marked with the dot causes the energy in the circulator to flow in the direction of the arrowhead marked with the dot. 376 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 15.9.1 General Commonly used for coaxial and waveguide transmission. Add: 15.9.1.1 Cavity resonator forming an integral part of tube 15.9.1.2 Cavity resonator, partly or wholly external to tube 377 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 15.9.4 Add: 15.9.5 Tetrapole 15.9.5.1 Tetrapole with loop coupler After 5.10.3 -|| ||| || || Add: | | |||| | | 15.10.4 Permanent magnet producing a transverse field (in a crossed field or magnetron type tube) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.10.5 Electromagnet producing a transverse field (in a crossed field or magnetron type tube) 378 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 15.11 Magnetron |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.11.1 Resonant type with coaxial output Add: 15.11.1A Magnetron oscillator tube with: || ||| || || | | |||| | | Indirectly heated cathode Closed slow-wave structure with dc connection by way of a waveguide Permanent field magnet Window-coupler to rectangular waveguide --     15.11.1A.1 After 15.11.3 Add: 15.11.4 Backward (traveling) wave oscillator tube (voltage tunable magnetron) with:        Indirectly heated cathode Intensity modulating electrode Beam-forming plate Closed slow-wave structure with dc connection by way of waveguide Nonemitting sole Permanent field magnet Window-coupler to rectangular waveguide 379 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.11.4.1 After 15.12.1 Add: 15.12.1A Reflex klystron with:       Indirectly heated cathode Beam-forming plate Grid Tunable integral cavity resonator Reflector Loop coupler to coaxial output 15.12.1A.1 380 -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 After 15.12.2 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Add: 15.12.3 Klystron with: || ||| || || | | |||| | | Indirectly heated cathode Intensity modulating electrode Beam-forming plate External tunable input cavity resonator Drift space electrode External tunable output cavity resonator with dc connection Collector Focusing coil Input loop coupler to coaxial waveguide Output window coupler to rectangular waveguide --           15.12.3.1 381 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 15.13 Add: 15.13.1 T-R tube After 15.14.8 Add: 15.14.9 O-type forward traveling wave amplifier tube with: -|| ||| || ||        | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Indirectly heated cathode Intensity modulating electrode Beam-forming plate Slow-wave structure with dc connection Collector Focusing coil Probe-couplers to rectangular waveguides each with sliding short For a simplified form see symbol 15.14.11.1. 15.14.10 O-type forward traveling wave amplifier tube with:        Indirectly heated cathode Intensity modulating electrode Beam-forming plate Slow-wave structure with dc connection Collector Permanent focusing-magnet Slow-wave couplers to rectangular waveguides 382 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 For a simplified form see symbol 15.14.11.1. | | |||| | | Indirectly heated cathode Intensity modulation electrode Beam-forming plate Slow-wave structure with dc connection Electrostatic focusing electrode Collector Slow-wave couplers to rectangular waveguides -- || ||| || ||        |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.14.11 O-type forward traveling wave amplifier tube with: For a simplified form see symbol 15.14.11.1. 15.14.11.1 O-type forward traveling wave amplifier tube, simplified representation (simplified form for symbols 15.14.9, 15.14.10, and 15.14.11) 15.14.12 M-type forward traveling wave amplifier tube with:  Indirectly heated cathode 383 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986        SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Intensity modulating electrode Beam-forming plate Preheated nonemitting sole Slow-wave structure with dc connection Collector Permanent transverse field magnet Window couplers to rectangular waveguides 15.14.12.1 -- 15.14.13 M-type backward (traveling) wave amplifier tube with: || ||| || || | | |||| | |     Filament-heated emitting sole Slow-wave structure with dc connection Permanent transverse field magnet Window-couplers to rectangular waveguides |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 384 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 15.14.13.1 15.14.14 M-type backward (traveling) wave oscillator tube with:         Indirectly heated cathode Intensity modulating electrode Beam-forming plate Nonemitting sole Slow-wave structure with dc connection by way of waveguide Collector Permanent transverse field magnet Window-coupler to rectangular waveguide -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.14.14.1 385 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.16 Filter 15.16.1 Mode filter The asterisk shall be replaced by the indication of the mode suppressed. After 15.16.2 Add: 15.16.3 Bandpass filter switched by gas discharge After 15.19 Add: 15.20 Multiport Devices -|| ||| || || 15.20.1 Three-port junction | | |||| | | NOTE — 14.20.1A: The type of coupling, power division proportions, reflection coefficients, etc, may be indicated as shown below. The angles between the ports may be drawn as convenient. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 15.20.1.1 EXAMPLE: Series T, E-plane T 386 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 15.20.1.2 EXAMPLE: Shunt T, H-plane T 15.20.1.3 EXAMPLE: Power divider: Power divided into ratio 6:4 15.20.2 Four-port junction -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 15.20.2.1 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTE — 15.20.2.1A: The convention is that the power entering at one port is conveyed only to the two directly connected ports and thence away from the device. 15.21 Lasers and Masers 15.21.1 Maser, general symbol NOTES: 15.21.1A — The symbol represents the transition from one energy level to a lower one. It is drawn preferably in the lower left-hand quarter of the square. 15.21.1B — Pumping by light may be shown by placing symbol 1.3.1 ( ) above a) An appropriate symbol chosen from 1.4, or b) The chemical symbol for the material For example of application, see symbol 15.21.2.2 387 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 15.21.1.1 EXAMPLE: Maser used as an amplifier 15.21.2 Laser (optical maser), general symbol The NOTES with symbol 15.21.1 apply. 15.21.2.1 EXAMPLES: Laser used as a generator 15.21.2.2 Ruby laser generator 388 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 15.21.2.3 Ruby laser generator, shown with xenon lamp as pumping source 16. Graphic Symbol for Composite Assemblies After 16.1.1 Add: 16.1.1A Item Equipment Functional unit NOTE — 16.1.1A: Suitable symbols or legends shall be inserted in or added to the symbol outline to indicate the item, equipment, or function. Revise 16.1.1.1 to read as follows: 16.1.1.1 Accepted abbreviations from ANSI Y1.1-1972 (R 1984) [1] may be used in the rectangle. 389 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR After 16.2.8 Add: 16.2.9 Negative impedance both-way amplifier 16.2.10 Amplifier with bypass used for signaling or power feeding, or both 16.2.11 Amplifier with external direct-current control NOTE — 16.2.11A: The controlled quantity may be indicated beside the arrowhead. Revise 16.9 to read as follows: 16.9 Gyro Gyroscope Gyrocompass Add: 16.9.1 Gyro 390 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 Add: 16.13 Changer, General Symbol Converter, General Symbol If the direction of change is not obvious, it may be indicated by an arrowhead on the outline of the symbol. A symbol or legend indicating the input or output quantity, waveform, etc may be inserted in each half of the general symbol to show the nature of the change. See IEC Publication 617-6 (1983) [17], Production and Conversion of Electrical Energy, and IEC Publication 617-10 (1983) [21], Telecommunications: Transmission. The diagonal line from this symbol is used in the form of a solidus to show a converting function. 16.13.1 DC converter 16.13.2 Rectifier 16.13.3 Rectifier in full wave (bridge) connection 16.13.4 Inverter 16.13.5 Rectifier/inverter 391 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 16.14 Galvanic Separator NOTE — 16.14A: If necessary, indication of the way of separation may be given below the qualifying symbol. For example: Galvanic separation by opto-coupler 16.15 Heat Source, General Symbol 16.15.1 Radioisotope heat source 16.15.2 Combustion heat source -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 16.16 Generator, General Symbol NOTE — 16.16A: For a rotating generator, use symbol * See 13.1 392 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 16.16.1 Thermoelectric generator, with combustion heat source -- || ||| || || 16.16.2 Thermoelectric generator with nonionizing radiation heat source 16.16.3 Thermoelectric generator with radioisotope heat source 16.16.4 Thermionic diode generator with nonionizing radiation heat source 16.16.5 Thermionic diode generator with radioisotope heat source 393 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 16.16.6 Photovoltaic generator 16.17 Sensors and Detectors 16.17.1 Proximity sensor 16.17.2 Proximity sensing device, block symbol -|| ||| || || NOTE — 16.17.2A: The method of operating may be indicated. | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 16.17.2.1 EXAMPLE: Capacitive proximity detector operating on the approach of solid material 16.17.3 Touch sensor 16.18 Applications of Sensors 16.18.1 Touch sensitive switch, make contact 394 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 16.18.2 Proximity switch, make contact 16.18.3 Proximity switch, operated on the approach of a magnet, make contact 16.18.4 Proximity switch, operated on the approach of iron, break contact 17. Graphic Symbols for Analog and Digital Logic Functions NOTE — 17A: The existing Section 17, symbols 17.1 through 17.9 (inclusive) filled a need for programming operations using general purpose computers equipped with removable programming (patch) panels. IEC Publication 617-13 (1978) [24] provides a more sophisticated system. 17.10 Analog Elements (IEC Publication 617-13 (1978) [24]) for Computation and Control 17.10.1 General Rules 1) 2) -- 3) || ||| || || | | |||| | | 4) |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 5) In many figures lowercase letters appear that are not part of the symbols and are added only for the purpose of identification of inputs and outputs as referenced in the description. The symbols for sign indication are + and -. They are placed inside the outline of the symbol adjacent to each relevant input and output. Weighting factors applied to the input signals are each indicated by a sign indicator in combination with a numerical value placed inside the outline of the symbol adjacent to the relevant input. In this standard w1, w2, ... wn which are understood to include the proper sign, will be used to denote the values of the weighting factors. When the weighting factor is +1 or -1, the number 1 may be omitted. The symbol f is used to denote the function of an anolog element. f may be replaced by a symbol or a graph denoting the actual function. EXAMPLE: 395 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Element in which: u = -f (2x, -y, z) 17.10.2 Qualifying symbols for signal identification See 1.15 17.10.3 Qualifying symbols for amplifiers 1) 2) When an element performs a specific function in addition to amplification, f may be replaced by the appropriate qualifying symbol (see symbols 17.10.3.1 to 17.10.3.4) or may be omitted if no confusion can arise. In particular cases, for example integrating amplifiers, special purpose inputs may be defined using symbols 17.10.3.5 to 17.10.3.11. If these symbols are not sufficient, controlling inputs should be labelled C1, C2 ... etc, and the effects of these should be defined in an associated table. 17.10.3.1 Summing |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 17.10.3.2 Integrating | | |||| | | 17.10.3.3 Differentiating -- || ||| || || 17.10.3.4 Logarithmic 17.10.3.5 Frequency compensation 17.10.3.6 Initial condition, analog value of integration 396 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 17.10.3.7 Control: the defined 1-state allows integration 17.10.3.8 Hold: the defined 1-state holds last value 17.10.3.9 Reset: the defined 1-state resets the output condition to zero 17.10.3.10 Set: the defined 1-state sets to initial condition 17.10.3.11 Supply voltage (to be used if special requirements exist). Any necessary identification of the supply (numeric) or polarity (+ or -) follows the letter U 17.10.4 Amplifiers 17.10.4.1 Amplifier for analog computation. General symbol. w1 … wn represent the signed values of the weighting factors. m1 … mk represent the signed values of the amplification factors. u 1 = m ⋅ m 1 ⋅ f ( w 1 ⋅ a 1, w 2 ⋅ a 2, …, w n ⋅ a n ) where: i = 1, 2, ... , k Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 397 IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR The sign of the amplification factor is to be maintained at each of the outputs, except for those being digital in nature. When there is only one amplification factor for the whole element, or there is a common factor resulting from weighting factors and amplification factors, the m in the qualifying symbol may be replaced by the absolute value. When m = 1, the number 1 may be omitted. Signs should always be maintained at analog outputs. The use of the sign ∞ as an amplification factor is recommended where the nominal open loop gain is very high and the knowledge of its exact value is not of particular concern. EXAMPLES: 17.10.4.2 High gain differential amplifier (operational amplifier) 17.10.4.3 High gain amplifier with a nominal amplification of 10 000 and two complementary outputs 17.10.4.4 Inverting amplifier with an amplification of 1 17.10.4.5 Amplifier with two outputs, the upper, noninverting, has an amplification of 2, the lower, inverting output, has an amplification of 3 398 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 17.10.4.6 17.10.4.7 Integrating amplifier (integrator) -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- If f = 1, g = 0, and h = 0. then t u = – 80 c ( t = 0 ) + ∫ ( 2a + 3b )dt 0 NOTE — The symbols for signal identification (∩ and #) may be omitted if no ambiguity arises. 17.10.4.8 Differentiating amplifier (differentiator) 399 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 17.10.4.9 Logarithmic amplifier 17.10.5 Function generators 17.10.5.1 Function generator, general symbol -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- x1 ... xn represent the arguments of the function and may each be replaced by an appropriate indication, provided that no ambiguity can arise. All weighting factors are assigned the value +1 and are therefore omitted. f(x1 ... xn) shall be replaced by an appropriate indication of, or reference to, the function (see for example, IEC Publication 27-1 (1971) [9]). NOTE — 17.10.5.1A: the graphic “/” shall not be used for the indication of the division because of ambiguity with the symbols for the level converter and the code converter. EXAMPLES: 17.10.5.2 Multiplier with weighting factor of -2 400 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 17.10.5.3 Divider -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 17.10.5.4 Multiplier-divider 17.10.5.5 Cotangent function 17.10.5.6 Exponential function 401 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 17.10.6 Coordinate converters 17.10.6.1 Coordinate converter, polar to rectangular 17.10.6.2 Coordinate converter, rectangular to polar 17.10.7 Signal convertors 1) 2) The indication of the specific relation between inputs and outputs may be shown inside the outline. If the digital information is serial, the most significant bit is presented first unless otherwise indicated. 17.10.7.1 Digital to analog converter. General symbol. 17.10.7.2 Analog to digital converter. General symbol. 402 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 17.10.7.3 Analog to digital converter that converts the input range 4 mA-20 mA into a 4-bit weighted binary code. 17.10.8 Electronic switches NOTE — Electronic switches are being considered in connection with binary logic elements. The results of this work may be published as a supplement to IEC Publciation 617-12 (1983) [23]. See ANSI/IEEE Std 91-1984 [4]. 17.10.8.1 Bidirectional switch (make), general symbol The analog signal can pass in either direction between c and d as long as the digital input e stands at its defined 1-state. NOTE — 17.10.8.1A: An arrow may be added to indicate an unidirectional switch (make). |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 17.10.8.2 EXAMPLE: The analog signal can pass only in the direction indicated by the arrow as long as the digital input e stands at its defined 1-state. -- The analog signal can pass in either direction between c and d as long as the digital input e stands at its defined 0-state. || ||| || || | | |||| | | 17.10.8.3 Bidirectional switch (break), general symbol NOTE — 17.10.8.3A: An arrow may be added to indicate an unidirectional switch (break). 17.10.8.4 EXAMPLE: The analog signal can pass only in the direction indicated by the arrow as long as the digital input e stands at its defined 0-state. 403 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 17.10.8.5 Bidirectional transfer switch operated by the AND function of two digital inputs. 17.10.9 Coefficient scaler -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | NOTE — 17.10.9A: The value of the coefficient may be shown adjacent to and outside the outline of the symbol. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 17.10.8.6 Two independent bidirectional switches (one make and one break), both operated by the same binary input. 20. Communications Equipment Relocate: 20.3.2 Relocate to 24.2.1 20.3.3 Relocate to 24.2.2 21. Graphic Symbols Commonly Used on System Diagrams, Maps, and Charts 21.1 Generating Station NOTES: 21.1A — Symbols for “planned” applications appear to the left; symbols for “in service” applications appear to the right. 404 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 21.1B — The preferred symbol is the square, but if necessary, a rectangle may be used. 21.1C — Relative sizes of symbols are shown. Symbol size may be reduced for small-size diagrams. See also paragraph A4.5 of the Introduction. 21.1.1 General |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- See NOTE 21.1A Add: || ||| || || | | |||| | | 21.1.2 Combined electric and heat generating station -- Revise to read as follows: 21.2 Hydroelectric Generating Station See NOTE 21.1A 21.2.1 General 21.2.2 Run of river 21.2.3 With storage 405 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 21.2.4 With pumped storage 21.3 Thermoelectric Generating Station See NOTE 21.1A 21.3.1 General 21.3.2 Coal or lignite fueled 21.3.3 Oil or gas fueled -|| ||| || || 21.3.4 Nuclear-energy fueled | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 406 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 21.3.5 Geothermic Add: |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 21.3.6 Solar generating station | | |||| | | Revise to read as follows: || ||| || || 21.4 Prime Mover (qualifying symbols) -- Use if essential to show the type of prime mover in a generating station. See NOTE 21.1A 21.4.1 Gas turbine 21.4.1.1 Application: shown for oil- or gas-fueled generating station 21.4.2 Reciprocating engine 407 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 21.4.2.1 Application: shown for oil- or gas-fueled generation station 21.5 Substation See NOTE 21.1A 21.5.1 General Avoid conflict with symbol 13.1.1 if used on the same diagram. 21.5.2 Rectifier substation Use if essential to show type of equipment. Add: 21.5.3 Converting substation, dc to ac shown -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 21.6 Wind Generating Station 408 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 21.7 Plasma Generating Station MHD (magneto-hydrodynamic) 24. Telecommunications Switching and Peripheral Equipment 24.1 Switching Systems The symbols in this section may be used to represent switching systems without regard to the type of equipment used as shown in the examples of trunking diagrams in the Appendix to this section. The following terms are used in this section with the meaning as given below. Connecting stage: An arrangement of inlets and outlets so that only one switching point is used to connect one inlet to an outlet. A number of connections may exist at any time in one connecting stage. Marking stage: In a common-control system, that sequence of connecting stages that is controlled by one marking process. A marking stage may consist of one or more connecting stages. Switching stage: A sequence of connecting stages that jointly perform a specified switching function, for example preselection or route selection. Highway-group: The maximum number of circuits that have access to one highway. 24.1.1 Connecting stage 24.1.1.1 Connecting stage, shown with inlets and outlets, general symbol 409 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR Circuits on one side can be connected individually to circuits on the other side 24.1.1.2 Connecting stage with x inlets and y outlets 24.1.1.3 Connecting stage composed of z grading groups, each consisting of x inlets and y outlets 24.1.1.4 Connecting stage with one group of inlets and two groups of outlets NOTE — 24.1.1.4A: The number of inlets or outlets in each group may be indicated by a figure on the relevant line. 24.1.1.5 Connecting stage interconnecting one group of bothway trunks with two groups of unidirectional trunks of opposite sense 24.1.2 Marking stage 24.1.2.1 Marking stage consisting of only one connecting stage NOTE — 24.1.2.1A: The qualifying symbol indicating a marking stage is a dot. It should be added to the inlets of the first connecting stage and to the outlets of the last connecting stage of that marking stage. 410 -- || ||| || || Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 24.1.2.2 EXAMPLES: Marking stage consisting of three connecting stages 24.1.2.3 Mixed marking stage consisting of one, two, and three connecting stages -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 24.1.3 Switching stage |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 24.1.3.1 Switching stage consisting of one connecting stage NOTE — 24.1.3.1A: The qualifying symbol indicating a switching stage is an arc. It should be added to the inlets of the first connecting stage and to the outlets of the last connecting stage of that switching stage. 24.1.3.2 EXAMPLES: Switching stage consisting of three connecting stages 24.1.3.3 Mixed switching stage consisting of one, two, and three connecting stages 24.1.4 Examples of trunking diagrams 24.1.4.1 Trunking diagram for a switching system that consists of two marking stages, ABC or ABCD and E, EF or EFG, interconnected by other equipment represented by the squares. Calls are routed as follows: 1) 2) 3) Incoming calls by way of DCBA Calls between subscribers connected to the same exchange by way of ABC, EF, and CBA Outgoing calls by way of ABC and either E, EF, or EFG 411 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 24.1.4.2 Trunking diagram of a switching system showing three switching stages 1) 2) 3) 412 Preselection stage A Route selection stage B or BC Final selection stage D -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 24.2 Block Symbols for Switching Equipment 24.2.1 Automatic switching* *Relocated from 20.3.2 24.2.2 Manual switchboard* *Relocated from 20.3.3 24.3 Qualifying Symbols for Transducers, Recorders, and Reproducers 24.3.1 Magnetic type 24.3.2 Moving coil or ribbon type |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 24.3.3 Moving iron type -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 24.3.4 Stereo type 24.3.5 Disc type 413 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 24.3.6 Tape or film type 24.3.7 Drum type 24.3.8 Recording or reproducing (the arrow points in the direction of energy transfer) 24.3.9 Recording and reproducing 24.3.10 Erasing 24.4 Recorders and Reproducers || ||| || || | | |||| | | NOTE — 24.4.1A: The qualifying symbol depicting a transducer head may be replaced by other qualifying symbols. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 24.4.1 Recorder or reproducer, or both, general symbol -- 24.4.1.1 EXAMPLE: Recorder and reproducer, magnetic drum type 414 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 24.4.2 Reproducer with a stylus operated head 24.4.3 Recorder, film-type, with a head producing modulated light 24.4.4 Reproducer, disc-type, with a light-operated head 25. Telecommunications Transmission 25.1 Amplified Circuits 25.1.1 Two-wire line with unidirectional amplification -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 25.1.2 Two-wire line with both-way amplification 415 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. -- IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR || ||| || || | | |||| | | 25.1.3 Four-wire circuit with both-way amplification |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 25.1.4 Four-wire type circuit with frequency separation 25.1.5 Four-wire circuit with both-way terminal amplification with echo suppression 25.2 Qualifying Symbols for Pulse Modulation 25.2.1 Pulse-position or pulse-phase modulation 25.2.2 Pulse-frequency modulation 416 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 25.2.3 Pulse-amplitude modulation 25.2.4 Pulse-interval modulation 25.2.5 Pulse-duration modulation 25.2.6 Pulse-code modulation NOTE — 25.2.6A: The * must be replaced by details of the code. 25.2.6.1 EXAMPLE: 3-out-of-7 code 25.3 Signal Generator Waveform Generator 25.3.1 Sine-wave generator, 500 Hz 417 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 25.3.2 Sawtooth generator, 500 Hz 25.3.3 Pulse generator 25.3.4 Variable frequency sine-wave generator -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 25.3.5 Noise generator k T = Boltzmann’s constant = absolute temperature 25.4 Changers Converter, General Symbol 25.4.1 Frequency changer, changing from f1 to f2 418 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 25.4.2 Frequency multiplier 25.4.3 Frequency divider 25.4.4 Pulse inverter 25.4.5 Code converter, five-unit binary code to seven-unit binary code 25.4.6 Changer giving clock-time indication in five-unit binary code 25.4.7 Pulse regenerator 25.5 Filters 419 -- Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 25.5.1 Filter, general symbol COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 25.5.2 High-pass filter 25.5.3 Low-pass filter 25.5.4 Band-pass filter 25.5.5 Band-stop filter 25.6 Networks 25.6.1 Device for pre-emphasis of higher frequencies 25.6.2 Device for de-emphasis of higher frequencies 25.6.3 Compressor 420 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 25.6.4 Expander 25.6.5 Artificial line 25.6.6 Phase-changing network NOTE — ϕ may be replaced by B if no confusion arises *Coordinate with symbol 15.17 25.6.7 Distortion corrector, general symbol 25.6.9 Phase/frequency distortion corrector -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | NOTE — 25.6.9A: If it is desirable to indicate that the equalization refers to the time derivative of ϕ, ϕ may be replaced by Φ. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 25.6.8 Amplitude/frequency distortion corrector, for example, equalizer 421 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 25.6.10 Delay/frequency distortion corrector 25.6.11 Nondistorting amplitude controller -|| ||| || || 25.6.12 Mixing network | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 25.7 Electronic Chopping Device 25.8 Threshold Devices There are two ways of showing details of the operation carried out by a threshold device. The first is the use of the symbol 25.8.1 supplemented by appropriate waveform symbols on the input and output lines. The second is the use of a specific symbol consisting of a rectangle containing a figure derived from the input/output characteristic in the following manner: The axes are deleted, but the origin is indicated by a short vertical stroke representing the y-axis EXAMPLE: The origin may be located in the rectangle in such a position that the characteristic makes the maximum use of the available space 422 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 EXAMPLE: 25.8.1 Threshold device, type unspecified (for example clipper) 25.8.2 Device having a linear input/output characteristic for all signals that exceed a given threshold value and which has no output for input signals having an instantaneous amplitude between zero and that threshold 25.8.3 Device having a linear input/output characteristic for all signals that exceed a preset threshold value and that has no output for input signals having an instantaneous amplitude between zero and that threshold 25.8.4 Positive peak clipper 25.8.5 Negative peak clipper Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 423 IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 25.9 Terminating Sets 25.9.1 Terminating set -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 25.9.2 Balancing network |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 25.9.3 Terminating set with balancing network 25.9.4 Hybrid transformer 25.9.5 Asymmetric (skew) hybrid transformer, shown with balancing network 424 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 25.9.6 Equipment for connecting a four-wire circuit to either a two-wire circuit or a four-wire circuit depending upon the reception of a control signal 25.10 Modulator Demodulator Discriminator 25.10.1 General symbol |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- NOTE — 25.10.1A: This symbol is used as follows: (Letters and input and output lines have been added in the figure for the purpose of explanation.) | | |||| | | a and b represent the modulating or modulated signal input and the modulated or demodulated signal output c represents the input of the carrier-wave if required || ||| || || Qualifying symbols may be placed inside or outside the symbol as shown below -- 25.10.1.1 Modulator, double side-band output 25.10.1.2 Pulse code modulator (seven-unit binary code output) 425 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 25.10.2 Demodulator, single side-band with suppressed carrier to audio 25.11 Concentrators Multiplexers 25.11.1 Concentrating switching function from left to right, qualifying symbol 25.11.2 Expanding switching function from left to right, qualifying symbol 25.11.3 EXAMPLES: Concentrator with m input circuits and n output circuits 25.11.4 Multiplexing function, qualifying symbol 25.11.5 Demultiplexing function, qualifying symbol NOTE — 25.11.5A: If confusion can arise, DX may be replaced by DMUX. 426 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 25.11.6 Multiplexing and demultiplexing function, qualifying symbol |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 25.11.7 Multiplexer with analog/digital conversion -- || ||| || || | | |||| | | 25.11.8 Multiplexer/demultiplexer with analog/digital conversion 25.12 Frequency Spectrum Diagram Symbol Elements A frequency spectrum is represented on a diagram by means of symbols on a horizontal frequency axis. The symbols show the functions of the various frequencies and frequency bands used in the transmission system as well as their relative positions in the spectrum. 25.12.1 Carrier frequency NOTES: 25.12.1A — When this symbol is used to represent a carrier that is modulated in frequency or phase the f or ϕ is added. See, for example, symbol 25.13.2. 25.12.1B — The arrowhead on the vertical line representing the carrier (and the arrowhead on the frequency axis) may be omitted if no confusion will result. 25.12.1.1 Suppressed-carrier frequency 427 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 25.12.1.2 Reduced-carrier frequency 25.12.2 Pilot frequency NOTE — 25.12.2A: For FDM transmission systems the order of the group to which the pilot refers, that is, group, supergroup, mastergroup, or supermastergroup may be indicated by adding the respective number 1, 2, 3, or 4 of oblique strokes. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- EXAMPLE: Supergroup pilot frequency 25.12.2.1 25.12.2.2 Suppressed pilot frequency 25.12.3 Additional measuring frequency 25.12.3.1 Additional measuring frequency, transmitted or measured on request 428 COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 25.12.4 Signaling frequency 25.12.5 Frequency band NOTES: 25.12.5A — If it is desired to show whether a particular band of frequencies is erect or inverted, symbol 25.12.6 or 25.12.7 should be used. 25.12.5B — The order of a band of frequencies forming part of a transmission system may be indicated by adding oblique strokes according to NOTE 25.12.2A of symbol 25.12.2. 24.12.5.1 EXAMPLE: Mastergroup NOTE — 25.12.5.1A: The division of a band into channels, groups, etc, may be shown by adding vertical lines. -|| ||| || || | | |||| | | 25.12.5.2 EXAMPLE: Band of frequencies from f1 to f2 divided into five channels, groups, etc. |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- 25.12.6 Erect band of frequencies NOTES: 25.12.6A — There is no indication of how much of the bandwidth shown by the symbol is actually used. 25.12.6B — This symbol may be used to represent a single channel, group, etc, or a number of channels, groups, etc, providing they are all erect. 429 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 25.12.6.1 EXAMPLE: Band of frequencies consisting of a group of 12 erect channels 25.12.6.2 25.12.7 Inverted band of frequencies NOTE — 25.12.6A and 25.12.6B apply. 25.12.8 Band of mixed channels, groups, etc, some erect, remainder inverted 25.13 Examples of Frequency Spectrum Diagrams 25.13.1 Amplitude-modulated carrier with both sidebands 25.13.2 Phase modulated carrier with both sidebands NOTE — 25.13.2A: For frequency modulation, replace ϕ with f. 430 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 25.13.3 Amplitude-modulated carrier with both sidebands, lower modulating frequencies not being transmitted 25.13.4 Amplitude-modulated carrier with both sidebands, modulating frequencies down to zero being transmitted 25.13.5 Single-sideband suppressed carrier 25.13.6 Reduced-carrier with single, lower, erect sideband 25.13.7 Suppressed-carrier with single-sideband scrambled for secrecy 25.13.8 Amplitude-modulated carrier with upper sideband and lower vestigial sideband, modulating frequencies down to zero being transmitted Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. 431 IEEE Std 315A-1986 SUPPLEMENT TO GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR 25.13.9 Band of five channels, groups, etc, four of which are inverted and one erect 25.13.10 4 MHz transmission system showing supergroups and pilot frequencies 25.14 Fiber Optic Devices 25.14.1 Guided light transmitter 25.14.2 Guided light receiver 432 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS IEEE Std 315A-1986 ANSI/IEEE Std 315A-1986 24 December, 1986 (Supplement to ANSI Y32.2-1975, ANSI/IEEE Std 315-1975) Acceptance Notice This non-Government standard was adopted on 24 December, 1986, and is approved for use by the DoD. The indicated industry group has furnished the clearance required by existing regulations. Copies of the document are stocked by DoD Single Stock Point, Naval Publications and Forms Center, Philadelphia, PA 19120, for issue to DoD activities only. Contractors and industry groups must obtain copies directly from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017. Title of Document: IEEE Standard Supplement to Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams Document No: ANSI/IEEE Std 315A-1986 Date of Specific Issue Adopted: 12 September, 1986 Releasing Industry Group: The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc Custodians: Army — AR Military Coordinating Activity: Navy — SH Army — AR Air Force — 16 Project DRPR-0285 Review Activities: Army — AV, ER, CR Navy — AS, OS, YD User Activities: Army — ME, MI Navy — EC, MC NOTICE: When reaffirmation, amendment, revision, or cancellation of this standard is proposed, the industry group responsible for this standard shall inform the military coordinating activity of the requested change and request participation. 433 Copyright © 1975 IEEE All Rights Reserved -- COPYRIGHT 2002; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc || ||| || || | | |||| | | |||| ||| || | ||| ||| ||||||||--- Document provided by IHS Licensee=BP Amoco/5928366101, User=, 11/19/2002 19:10:07 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584.